modular electronic devices evices devices

modular electronic devices evices devices
MODULAR ELECTRONIC
MODULAR
ELECTRO
ONIC
ONIC
DEVICES
DEVICES
VIC S
ELKO EP Russia
T EC
ECHNIC
HNIC A L C ATA L OGUE
ELKO EP Poland
ELKO EP Germany
ELKO EP Austria
~
ELKO EP Espana
MODULAR
M
O D LA E
ELECTRONIC
EC R N C D
DEVICES
V C S - TECHNICAL
E HN A L CATALOGUE
ATA L G U
ELKO EP Ukraine
ELKO EP Czech Republic
ELKO EP Slovakia
ELKO EP Hungary
iNELS Asia (China)
iNELS SmartHome LLC a company of ELKO EP Holding
3029 Bradbury Rd | Madison, WI 53719 | USA
phone: +420 573 514 221 | fax: +420 573 514 227 | [email protected] | www.elkoepusa.com
Published: 09/2015 / Modifications or amendments reserved / © Copyright ELKO EP, s.r.o. / 1st edition
www.elkoep.com
Introducing ELKO EP
ELKO EP is enjoying its twenty-fourth year in the
competitive and rapidly expanding electronics
market. We maintain our position thanks to our own
product development and precision manufacturing
and distribution of devices. Our products make your
day easier at home and, in industry, they make
possible a reliable and fluid process of automation
technology.
A dynamic time requires fast-developing solutions.
We can fortunately say that our work begins with
our in-house development of devices that you our customers - are now demanding. To meet your
needs, we are quickly modernizing our production
environment, last year expanding automated
production to include the latest fast SMD technology,
which can handle production of up to 1,000,000
products per month. Our internal testing laboratory
and two-phase final inspection ensure the highest
quality of our manufactured products.
For several years now, we have been working intensively to develop intelligent electrical installations - in both bus and wireless design. Intelligent
electrical installation (iNELS), as we designed it, does not just mean control of ordinary electrical elements such as light bulbs or sockets, but
includes control of all technologies in the home including multimedia. And that ranks iNELS among the top in its field thanks to the complex concept
and control of applications.
Our mission is to bring customers modern wiring solutions that make everyday life easier, facilitate work and save money. While others merely sell,
we develop and produce. ELKO EP, always something more.
ELKO EP in numbers
Headquarters - production facility: Holešov, Czech Republic Year founded: 1993
Number of employees: 194 in Holešov, 254 in ELKO Holding
Branches: Slovakia, Poland, Hungary, the Ukraine, Russia, Germany, Spain,
Austria, Dubai.
Consolidated revenue: > 20 mil. EUR Export countries: > 66
Important OEM customers: Schneider Electric, Eaton, Siemens, ETI, TYCO, GE
Certification of processes: ISO 9001, ISO14001
Certification of products: CE (EU), UL (USA), GOST (RU), Ukrstandart (UA) a.j.
Awards
2
AWARDS GOLDEN
PRODUCT FOR THE SMR-T
AWARDS JIŘÍ KONEČNÝ
ENTREPRENEUR
OF THE YEAR 2004
COMPANY OF THE YEAR
2012 VODAFONE
THE HONORABLE
MENTION “VISIONARIES”
FOR “WIRELESS SYSTEM”
AWARDS RF TOUCH
BOHEMIAN-MORAVIAN
ASSOCIATIONS
Super-multifunction
relay SMR-T won the
GOLDEN PRODUCT
Award at the electrical
fair in Ostrava.
In 2004 Jiří Konečný won
the Entrepreneur
of the Year award.
In 2012, ELKO EP became
Vodafone Company
of the Year of the Zlín
Region and placed second
nationwide.
In 2013 ELKO EP Ltd.
received the honorary
mention of the jury
ChzechInfo.
The company ELKO EP s.r.o.
won the prestigious GOLDEN
AMPERE Award for the
product RF Touch.
Product Lines ELKO EP
www.elkoep.com
RELAYS - Modular electronic devices
A wide range of electronic modular devices, which bring new possibilities to home and office control, monitoring and security, as well as
to industrial process control: time relays, installation contactors, staircase automatic switches, time switches clocks, dimmers, thermostats,
power supplies units, control and signalling devices,GSM gates, etc.
www.inels.com
iNELS RF Control - Wireless control
A unique wireless control system providing you perfect control over your home! The RF Control system enables you to control functions such as
heating, lighting, electrical appliances and window shutters, all with a single touch. No wall cutting, fast and easy installation, exclusive design
of wireless wall switch buttons and other components.
Smart home kits
www.inels.com/kits
Smart kit is a starter kit for Smart Home or House with intelligent electro-installation. After Smartphones and Smart TV, Smart house is the next
step in the development of modern technology and housing.
www.inels.com
iNELS BUS SYSTEM - Intelligent electro-installation system
iNELS will transform your house into a timeless intelligent household. It will take charge of heating and air-conditioning, regulation, lighting
control and home appliance switching, while also providing perfect security for your home. Enjoy controlling your entire house via a TV screen
thanks to iNELS Multimedia (iMM) or use the App for your smartphone or tablet.
www.elkoep.com
AUDIO/VIDEO
In this group you can find products, which brings you a new dimension of controlling music, video and home appliances. These are not just
ordinary controllers but products which can be a pefrect part of your electro-installation.
www.elkoep.com
LOGUS90 – Home switches and sockets
We offer you exclusive switches, sockets and accessories in a standard plastic or metallic design. However, there are also charming luxury
frames from purely natural materials such as genuine wood, metal, granite or hardened glass. Be especial!
ELKO Lighting s.r.o.
www.elkoep.com
We don‘t only supply LED light sources to the market, but also we bring a complex lighting solution. Our goal is to supply quality and affordable
LED light sources and provide a high-level of service - always to satisfy our customers!
Attained awards
GOLDEN AMPER AWARDS
FOR „RF T
Touch“
AWARD OF CZECH AND
MORAVIAN ELECTRICAL AND
ELECTRONIC ASSOCIATION
RF Touch – wireless touch
control unit won the
GOLDEN AMPER.
The ELKO EP product
“LARA” has gained the
award – Innovative Product
of the Year 2014.
AWARD FOR THE
SMART RF BOX
„eLAN-RF-003“
In the competition Top
Energie 2014, the product
„Smart RF box eLANRF-003“ won third place.
CZECH TOP
100 AWARD
ELKO EP ranked among the
best 100 Czech companies.
FINALIST OF THE
COMPETITION
„MANAGER OF THE YEAR
2014“
Mr. Jiří Konečný was
granted the title “Manager
of the year 2014” by the
National Commission.
3
Memberships
Custom Electronic Design and
Association
Smart Housing Association
Custom Electronic Design and Association is an
international trade organization for residential
automation technology with more than 3,500
members as companies from all over the world.
It is built on a strong foundation and provides
access to the best education, certification,
research and raising aware-ness among
consumers.
It was founded in the U.S in 1989 and now CEDIA
is leading world authority in the given industry.
The Smart Homes Association brings
together experts from the field of equipment
manufacturers for smart homes. Members
are basically manufacturers of smart wiring,
audio / video, air conditioning, heat recovery,
home appliances, cameras, security system,
lighting and other technologies.
The head of the association since 2013 is the
managing director and the CEO of ELKO EP
company, Mr. ‚‘ Jiri Konecny ‚‘.
ElA association
ElA association deals with the association of
electro technical enterprises with long tradition
in our republic.
The Association‘s business and employer
association, brings together legal and individual
person from the electronic and electro technical
industry, medical technology, information
services and other services with similar product
orientation or business interests.
Our products under well-known brand names worldwide!
Our company offers wide range of electronic modular devices, which bring new possibilities for home and office controlling, monitoring and
security, as well as for industrial process control. Development and modern technology are the pillars of our work, which is highly appreciated
by our customers, because all products and services can be customized according to individual requirements – you get not just a product, but a
long-term solution. Our own development facilities, precision production and distribution give us the opportunity to use solutions which are both
innovative and practical. Modern production facilities ensure an efficient manufacturing of high-quality innovative products. Our facilities have been
extended to include the newest and cost-effective SMD line – guaranteeing complete customer satisfaction (higher quality and greater supply
chain flexibility). We deeply appreciate our long-term business partners, successful cooperation and the confidence they placed in us! For many of
them we launch new products under their brand name. We appreciate their support, feedback and a mutually enriching experience!
4
CRM-91H - our best seller!
10 REASON
….why the CRM-91H/UNI is our best seller?
! universal supply 12-240 AC/DC
! components are from high quality suppliers (relay
from Tyco with switching cycles over 30 millions)
! contact current rating – 16A
! time range from 0,1 s till 10 days
! laser printing (even after 10 years, you will clearly
see the parameters and options)
! certification which meets requirements of the
World standards (UL, CE, PT,…)
! 20 years of experience what guarantees top quality
! 10 frequently-used functions
- proved by satisfied customers as Schneider
! box from non-flammable material with UV
Electric, Eaton, Dayton, Siemens etc.
protection (box will never fade)
! double vendor inspection
5
Training
Attend our lively and inspiring webinars – surely
everyone could find something! At our training, we
around like to familiarize you with our Smart Solutions
and products. That usually includes, modular electronic
devices, iNELS BUS System, iNELS RF Control and Relay.
Finally, we are organizing three different types of
training to meet all of your expectations and more!
Please note that our capacity is limited so please register
right away and come with us on a journey into the future
of iNELS Smart Home & Building Automation.
All you require is an internet connection and to download
and install GoToWebinar app.
When you start or join a webinar, the installation package
will be downloaded onto your computer.
We recommend starting this download process at least
10 minutes before the start of webinars so you are able
to complete it and enter webinars on time.
6
You can find more information on our web site:
http://www.elkoep.com/events/trainings/
Choose the right one!
CLASSIC ELECTRO-INSTALLATION
Controlling
appliances
Dimming
lights
Controlling
blinds
Heating
regulation
Thermovalve
Detectors
Control via
smartphone
Controlling household appliances
Door
communicator
Weather
station
Video cameras
Audio Zone
PC /Laptop
Tablet
(outdoor/indoor)
(music playback)
Touch
panel
Video Zone
(controlling via TV)
WIRELESS ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
Controlling
appliances
Dimming
lights
Controlling
blinds
Heating
regulation
Group controller
Detectors
Control via
smartphone
Controlling household appliances
Door
communicator
Weather
station
Video cameras
Audio Zone
PC /Laptop
Tablet
(outdoor/indoor)
(music playback)
Touch
panel
Video Zone
(controlling via TV)
BUS ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
Controlling
appliances
Dimming
Stmívání
lights
osvětlení
Controlling
blinds
Heating
Regulace
regulation
vytápění
Wireless
switch
Detectors
Detektory
Control via
smartphone
Controlling household appliances
Door
communicator
Weather
station
Video cameras
Audio Zone
PC /Laptop
Tablet
(outdoor/indoor)
(music playback)
Touch
Dotykový
panel
Video Zone
(controlling via TV)
7
Catalogue content
Modular electronic devices
Time relays
Time relays review
PLUG-IN - PRM-91H/8, PRM-91H/11, PRM-92H, PRM-2H
Single-function time relay CRM-81J, CRM-83J
Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO
Doublestage delay unit SJR-2
Delay ON star/delta CRM-2T
Asymmetric cycler CRM-2H
Multifunction time relays
CRM-61
CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE - with external potentiometer
Staircase switch CRM-4
CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S
Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B
Super-multifunction relay SMR-T, SMR-B
Digital time switch SHT-1, SHT-1/2, SHT-3, SHT-3/2
Power and auxiliary relays
Power and auxiliary relays review
Modular VS316/24, VS316/120, VS116U, VS308U
Dimmers
Overview of dimmers
LIC-2 new!
DIM-15, SMR-M
Power supplies
Power supplies review
Line PS
Other modular devices
Review
Twilight switch SOU-1
Twilight and light switch SOU-3
Memory relay MR-41, MR-42
Monitoring relays
Monitoring relays review
HRN-3x, HRN-6x
Relay monitoring 3-phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N
HRN-41, HRN-42
Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-56 (120, 208, 240)
Monitoring relay
Power factor monitoring relay COS-1
Monitoring current relays
PRI-32
PRI-51
PRI-53
PRI-41, PRI-42
8
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
37
38
40
41
42
43
46
48
50
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Modular electronic devices
Level monitoring relay
Level monitoring relays HRH-5
Level monitoring relays HRH-1
Level monitoring relays HRH-6
Level monitoring relays HRH-7 new!
Level sensors to level switches SHR-1M, SHR-1N, SHR-2, SHR-3 (accessories)
Thermostats
Thermostats review
Analog and digital thermostats
Modular thermostat TER-3 (A, B, C, D, G, H)
Modular thermostat TER-3 (E, F)
Modular 2-stage thermostat TER-4
Modular multifunction digital thermostat TER-9
Modular thermostat for controlling temperature of motor winding TER-7
Energy-saving digital thermo-valve ATV-1
Humidistat RHT-1
Accessories
Thermal sensors to thermostats TC, TZ, PT-100
Installation contactors
Installation contactors review
Installation contactors and installation contactors with manual control
VS120, VS220, VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463
VSM220, VSM425
Loadability of installation contactors
EAN codes
Technical information
Main instructions (for correct use of products)
Product loadability
Electromagnetic compatibility of products
Products packing
Dimensions
Support of project design
Examples of usage
Examples of usage
Production technology
59
60
62
64
66
68
69
70
71
72
74
75
76
77
79
80
82
83
84
86
87
89
90
91
95
96
102
106
9
Time relays
Single-function
CRM-81J
CRM-83J
CRM-82TO
SJR-2
CRM-2T
CRM-2H
CRM-2HE
3 functions and 6 time
ranges, multivoltage
supply, output 16A
changeover / SPDT.
as CRM-81J but with 3x8A
changeover output / SPDT.
“true OFF” relay - delay off
without supply, for backup circuits.
two-state delay unit
(2x delay on), gradual
switching of high loads.
delay start-up of motors
star / delta.
asymmetric cycler,
independent time setting
ON/OFF.
as CRM-2H, but time
setting by external
potentiometers (for
frequent setting).
Multifunction
Analog
CRM-91H
CRM-93H
CRM-9S
CRM-61
CRM-91HE
10 functions, 10 time
ranges, 1x output 16A
changeover / SPDT,
multivoltage supply.
as CRM-91 but output
3x8A chageover / SPDT.
as CRM-91 but contactless
output (triac 0.7A).
cost effective version of
CRM-91H, 6 functions,
6 time ranges. Output 8A
changeover / SPDT, supply
AC 24-240 V, DC 24V.
as CRM-91H but with
time setting by external
potentiometer
(for frequent setting).
Digital
PDR-2A
PDR-2B
4 digit display, 16 functions,
2 independent times
0.01s-100 hrs, 2 outputs 16A
changeover / SPDT
START/STOP inputs.
as PDR-2A but 10 functions
for each output and time meaning two relays in one
device.
SHT-1, SHT-1/2 SHT-3, SHT-3/2
SHT1: time switch with
daily, weekly programming.
1-channel, output 16 A
changeover / SPDT. SHT1/2:
as SHT-1, but 2-channel.
as SHT-1 but with daily,
weekly, monthly, and
annual programming up
to 2095. SHT3/2: as SHT-3,
but 2-channel.
PLUG-IN
PRM-91H/11
PRM-91H/8
PRM-92H
PRM-2H
as CRM-91H but into
11-pin socket,
multivoltage supply,
output contact 16 A.
as PRM-91H/11 but with
8-pin socket,
output contact 16A.
as PRM-91H but with
2x changeover / SPDT
8A contacts,
into 11-pin socket.
as CRM-2H but with
11-pin socket,
2x changeover,
8A contact.
MINI
SMR-T
SMR-B
super multifunction relay
for installation into a wiring
box, 3 wire connection
(without neutral).
output relay contact 16 A
(possibility to switch also
fluorescent lights).
Staircase switch
CRM-4
basic version, time 0.5-10
min, output contact 16 A,
anti-blocking function.
10
socket to DIN
rail
ES-11 (11 pin),
ES-8 (8 pin).
Potentiometer
potentiometer - external
control unit for CRM-91HE
and CRM-2HE, mounting
into a switchboard, max
connection length 10 m.
Time relay review
Functions
SMR-B
SMR-T
a -delay off on
entering edge
b - delay off on
downward edge
c - delay off on
downward edge
d - cycler - flasher
by impuls
e - pulse shift
f - delay on
g- pulse relay
h - impulse relay
with delay
i - cycler starting
with gap
j - delay on after
switched off
0.1 - 1 s
1 - 10 s
Time
0.1 - 1 min
1 - 10 min
0.1 - 1 h
1 - 10 h
0.1 - 1 day
Supply voltage
1 - 10 days
AC 120 V
Number of contacts
1-MODULE
2-MODULE
3-MODULE
PLUG-IN
Rotary switch
Button
Sliding switch
External potentiometer
Delay OFF after switch off
the Input supply
Delay ON
Delay OFF
Symmetrical cycler starting
with delay
Delay OFF
after impulse OFF
Symmetrical cycler
starting with impulse
Staircase switch
Impulse shift
Memory (impulse) relay
Impulse generator
Delay ON at switch on
controlling contact
Asymmetric cycler starting
with delay
Asymmetric cycler starting
with impulse
Delay ON
star / delta
Switching in real time
Impuls relay in delay ON
0.1 - 1 s
1 - 10 s
0.1 - 1 min
1 - 10 min
0.1 - 1 hrs
1 - 10 hrs
0.1 - 1 day
1 - 10 days
3 - 30 days
10 - 100 days
30 s - 10 min
99 h 59 min 59 s
Day
Week
Month
Year
12 - 240 V AC/DC
12 - 240 V AC
120 V AC
1x changeover/ SPDT 8 A
1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A
2x changeover 8 A
2x changeover 16 A
3x changeover/ 3PDT 8 A
Static output (triac)
1x NO 16 A
Type
1x triac
1x NO AgSnO2
( )
( )
OUTPUT
SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
TIME
FUNCTIONS
ADJUSTING
DESIGN
Type
Chart 2. Version - mounting into an installation box
CRM-81J/ZR
CRM-81J/ZN
CRM-81J/BL
CRM-83J/ZR
CRM-83J/ZN
CRM-83J/BL
CRM-82TO
CRM-91H
CRM-93H
CRM-91HE
CRM-2HE
CRM-9S
CRM-2H
CRM-4
CRM-61
SJR-2
PDR-2/A
PDR-2/B
SHT-1 (SHT-1/2)
SHT-3 (3/2)
PRM-91H
PRM-92H
PRM-2H
Chart 1. Version - DIN rail mounting
11
Plug-in time relay PRM-91H, PRM-92H, PRM-2H
!
!
EAN code
PRM-91H-8 /UNI:
PRM-91H-11 /UNI:
PRM-92H /UNI:
PRM-2H /UNI:
8595188135511
8595188111638
8595188111096
8595188111645
Technical Parameters
Number of functions:
Supply:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Control
Control. voltage:
Control power input:
Load between 5-10:
Control terminals:
Max. capacity of cable control:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
Multifunction time relay PRM-91H
8 or 11 pin type
10 time functions, time scale from 0.1 s to 10 days is divided into 10 ranges
output contact 1x 16 A / 4000VA, 250V AC1
!
Multifunction time relay PRM-92H
11 pin type
10 time functions, time scale from 0.1 s to 10 days is divided into 10 ranges
output contact 2x 8 A / 2000 VA, 250V AC1
!
Asymmetric cycler PRM-2H
11 pin type
2 time functions, time scale from 0.1 s to 100 days is divided into 10 ranges
output contact 2x 8 A / 2000 VA, 250 V AC1
!
Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V
Output indication: multif. red LED, flashing at certain states
PLUG-IN relays
!
!
PRM-91H/8 PRM-91H/11
pins 2 and 7
PRM-92H
Multifunction time relays are equivalents by module types of relay, designed to standardized plump 11 or 8pin socket
Pin type enables easy changing, replacement older type of relays (pin-compatible) or easy changing
auxiliary relay for time relays
PRM-2H
10
2
pins 2 and 10
pins 2 and 10
pins 2 and 10
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 days
0.1 s - 100 days
rotaty switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F (0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C)
1x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 2x changeover / DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
8 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s 10 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
multifunction red LED
3x107
0.7x105
in the supply voltage range
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W
Yes
2-5
0.1μF
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
max. 150 ms
Symbol
LEGEND TO DESCRIPTION
polarity - outputs / number on module / on socket
PRM-91H
11 pin
8 pin
A1/2/+
5 A2/10/-
4
3
A1/2/+
1
5
4
A2/7/-
1
PRM-92H, PRM-2H
A1/2/+
5 A2/10/-
4
3
1
8
9
11
Description
Supply indication
Output indication
d
Rought time setting
Fine time setting
Function setting
2.01 oz. (57 g)
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
2.5 kV
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
2˝ x 1.5˝ x 2.1˝ (50 x 38 x 53 mm)
2.01 oz. (57 g)
2.05 oz. (58 g)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Supply indication
Output indication
2.05 oz. (58 g)
Rought time setting
IMPULSe
Fine time setting
IMPULSe
Rought time setting PAUSE
Fine time setting PAUSE
12
3
Plug-in time relay PRM-91H, PRM-92H, PRM-2H
Connection
Functions PRM-2H
Recommended socket for DIN rail
PRM-92H/11
PRM-91H/8
ES-11
Choice Function in PRM-2H is done by connecting terminals 2 and 5
ES-8
Cycler beginning with pulse
5
6
5
7
U
2
4
5
R
t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2
8
4
3
9
2
10
1
+A1
1
- A2
Cycler beginning with pause
7
2
11
Un
6
3
+A1
U
8
Un
2
-A2
11 pin
5
8 pin
S
R
t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1
Functions of PRM-91H, PRM-92H
On Delay (Power On)
When the input voltage U is applied, timing delay t begins. Relay contacts
R change state after time delay is complete. Contacts R return to their shelf
state when input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this
function.
a
Off Delay
When input voltage U is applied, relay contacts R change state immediately
and timing cycle begins. When time delay is complete, contacts return to
shelf state. When input voltage U is removed, contacts will also return to b
their shelfstate. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
Repeat Cycle (Starting Off )
When input voltage U is applied, time delay t begins. When time delay t
is complete, relay contacts R change state for time delay t. This cycle will
repeat until input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this
function.
c
Repeat Cycle (Starting On)
When input voltage U is applied, relay contacts R change state immediately
and time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, contacts return to d
their shelf state for time delay t. This cycle will repeat until input voltage U
is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
Off Delay (S Break)
Input voltage U must be applied continuously. When trigger switch S is
closed, relay contacts R change state. When trigger switch S is opened,
delay t begins. When delay t is complete, contacts R return to their shelf
state. If trigger switch S is closed before time delay t is complete, then time
is reset. When trigger switch S is opened, the delay begins again, and relay
contacts R remain in their energized state. If input voltage U is removed,
relay contacts R return to their shelf state.
e
Single Shot
Upon application of input voltage U, the relay is ready to accept trigger
signal S. Upon application of the trigger signal S, the relay contacts R
transfer and the preset time t begins. During time-out, the trigger signal S
is ignored. The relay resets by applying the trigger switch S when the relay
is not energized.
U
t
t
Single Shot Trailing Edge (Non-Retriggerable)
Upon application of input voltage U, the relay is ready to accept trigger signal
S. Upon application of the trigger signal S, the relay contacts R transfer and the
preset time t begins. At the end of the preset time t, the relay contacts R return to
their normal condition unless the trigger switch S is opened and closed prior to
time out t (before preset time elapses). Continuous cycling of the trigger switch
S at a rate faster than the preset time will cause the relay contacts R to remain
closed. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state.
U
t
t
U
t
t
t
t
t
U
t
t
t
t
t
t
S
t
t
t
t
g
S
t
h
S
Latching relay
Input voltage U must be applied continuously. Output changes state with
every trigger switch S closure. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts
R return to their shelf state.
i
S
Pulse generator
Upon application of input voltage U, a single output pulse of 0.5 seconds is
delivered to relay after time delay t. Power must be removed and reapplied
to repeat pulse. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
j
On/Off Delay
Input voltage U must be applied continuously. When trigger switch S is
closed, time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, relay contacts
R change state and remain transferred until trigger switch S is opened. If
input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state.
t
S
f
t
t
t
t
t
U
t
pulse
t
pulse
pulse = 0.5 s
Time ranges PRM-91H, PRM-92H
m
10
1
h
1 10
10
S1
m
10
1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
0.1 - 1s
ON
OFF
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
1 - 10 hrs
h
1 10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
1 - 10 s
ON
OFF
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
0.1 - 1 day
h
1 10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
0.1 - 1 min
ON
OFF
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
1 - 10 days
h
1 10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
1 - 10 min
ON
OFF
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
only ON
h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
S1
0.1 - 1 h
1 d
10
ON
OFF
only OFF
Time ranges PRM-2H
m
10
1
10
S1
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
30
100
h
1 10
m
1 d
10
0.1 - 1s
m
1 d
10
30
100
10
1
10
S1
1 - 10 hrs
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
30
100
h
1 10
m
1 d
10
1 - 10 s
m
1 d
10
30
100
10
1
10
S1
0.1 - 1 day
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
30
100
h
1 10
m
1 d
10
0.1 - 1 min
m
1 d
10
30
100
10
1
10
S1
1 - 10 days
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
30
100
h
1 10
m
1 d
10
1 - 10 min
m
1 d
10
30
100
10
1
10
S1
3 - 30 days
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
h
1 10
0.1 - 1 h
1 d
10
30
100
10 - 100 days
13
Single-function time relay CRM-81J, CRM-83J
! Single-function
EAN code
CRM-81J according to type
CRM-83J according to type
Technical parameters
Functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Control
Consumption of input:
Load between S-A2:
Control terminals:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Power of control input:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
R
CRM-81J
and single-time relay with fine time setting by a potentiometer (within the frames of a particular
time range)
! Suitable for applications where function and time requirements are known
! Time switch, possible to be used for pump delay after switching heating off, switching of fans
! Choice of 3 functions:
1) ZR - Delay ON
2) ZN -Delay OFF
3) BL - Repeat Cycle
! Functions can be controlled by supply voltage or time scale control input:
(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 6 s - 60 s / 1 min - 10 min / 6 min - 60 min / 1 h - 10 hrs)
! Universal voltage range AC/DC 12 - 240 V
! Output contact: CRM-81J: 1x changeover / SPDT 16 A
CRM-83J: 3x changeover / SPDT 8 A
! Red LED output indicator
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
CRM-83J
Symbol
ZR - delay ON / ZN - delay OFF / BL- cycler 1:1
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 h (in 6 ranges)
potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F (0.01% / °C, at =20 °C)
CRM-81J
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 3x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
16 A / AC1
2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
10 A / < 3 s
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
Un
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W
Yes
A1-S
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
max. 150 ms
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.2 oz. (62 g)
3 oz. (86 g)
UL E308660 (for CRM-81J); EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Connection
16 18
A1
Un
Un
-
+
A1
A1
A1
15
S A2
CRM-83J
16 18 26 28 36 38
-
+
S A2
S A2
35 36 38
25 26 28
S A2
15
25
35
15 16 18
16
+
A1
S It is possible to connect the load between terminals
S-A2 (e.g. contactor, pilot lamp or another device),
without compromising the correct operation of the
relay (the load is energized as long as the switch
button is closed).
A2
load
15 16 18
18
15
Example of an order
CRM-81J/UNI, ZR10s
1x changeover contact, voltage AC/DC 12-240 V, function: delay ON, time 1 - 10 s.
CRM-83J/UNI, BL1h
3x changeover contact, voltage AC/DC 12-240 V, function: cycler begin with impulse, time
6-60 min.
Functions
ZR - Delay ON
ZN - Delay OFF
BL - Cycler 1:1
U
S
U
S
U
S
t
t
t
t
t t t t t
t
t t
Note: the function ZR and ZN is controlled by supply voltage and control input ie. Once phase failure
is detected and supply voltage is re applied, The relay automatically makes one cycle.
Time range
1s
10 s
1 min
10 min
min
0.1 s
1s
6s
1 min
1 hr
6 min
10 hrs
1 hr
max
1s
10 s
60 s
10 min
60 min
10 hrs
Description
Supply terminals
A1
S A2
Control input “S”
Supply indication
Output indication
Time setting
15
14
16
18
Output contact
Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO
! „True OFF“ relay - relay timing without supply voltage
! Example of use: back-up source for Delay OFF in case of voltage failure (e.g. emergency lighting, emergency respirator,
or protection of el. controlled doors - in case of fire)
! 2 time functions adjustable by rotary switch:
a - Delayed return after disconnecting of supply
e - Delayed start
! Time range (adjustable by rotary switch and fine setting by potentiometer):
0.1 s - 10 min
! Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V
! Interruptions in the power supply must take time steps (tens to hundreds of milliseconds)
! Output contact: 2x changeover / DPDT 8 A
! Output status indicated by red LED (only in case of supply voltage connection)
! Clamp terminals
EAN code
CRM-82TO /UNI: 8595188137614
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting / DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
R
Symbol
CRM-82TO
a - On Delay (Power On) / e - Off Delay (S Break)
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 min
potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.1 % / °F, at = 68 °F (0.1 % / °C, at = 20 °C)
2x changeover / DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC
10 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C )
4 kV (supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 2x1.5 or 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
3.3 oz. (93 g)
UL E 308660; EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Connection
Un
A1
A2
16 18 26 28
15
A1
A2
16
26
18
28
15
25
25
Description
Supply terminals
Output contact
A1
A2
16
26
Output indication
CRM- 82TO
Supply indication
Rough time setting
Fine time setting
FUNC
e
28
18
15
Function setting
a
Output contact
25
Output contact
Function
a - Delay OFF (S break) the power supply is
switched off (min. time is 0.5 s)
U
t
U
e - Off Delay (S break)
t
t
15
Doublestage delay unit SJR-2
! For gradual switching of high power (e.g. el.heating), prevents current strokes in the main
! Function: 2x Delay ON (2 time relays in one)
! Time scale 0.1s - 10 days divided into 10 time ranges:
0.1s - 1s / 1s - 10s / 0.1min - 1min / 1min - 10min / 0.1h - 1h / 1h - 10hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day / 1 day - 10 days / ON / OFF
! Times t1 and t2 are independantly adjustable
! t1 and t2 are switched on after supply voltage connection
! Rough time setting via rotary switch
! Voltage range: AC/DC 12 - 240 V
! Output contact: 2 x changeover / DPDT 16 A
! Output indication: multifunction red LED, flashing at certain states
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
SJR-2 /UNI: 8595188117401
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Symbol
SJR-2
2x delay ON
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 days
rotaty switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F (0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C)
Connection
Function
Un
A1
A1
16 18 26 28
A2
U
15-18
t1
t2
25-28
25 26 28
A2
15
25
15 16 18
2x changeover / DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
multifunction red LED
3x107
0.7x105
max. 150 ms
Description
Supply voltage terminals
A2
A1
Output indication
Supply voltage indication
U
Rought time setting t1
Fine time setting t1
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
Rought time setting t2
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
Fine time setting t2
4 kV (supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
3.1 oz. (88 g)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
15-18
t1
25-28
t2
LED
25
26
28
Output contact
15
16
18
Output contact
Time ranges
m
10
1
h
1 10
10
S1
m
10
1
10
S1
16
1 d
10
m
0.1 - 1 s
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
S1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
1
m
1 - 10 hrs
10
1
10
S1
1 d
10
m
1 - 10 s
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
S1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
1
m
0.1 - 1 day
10
1
10
S1
1 d
10
m
0.1 - 1 min
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
S1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
1
m
1 - 10 days
10
1
10
S1
1 d
10
1 - 10 min
1 d
10
ON
OFF
10
1
h
1 10
10
S1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
m
m
only ON
10
1
10
S1
1 d
10
0.1 - 1 h
ON
OFF
h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
only OFF
Delay ON star/delta CRM-2T
!
It serves for delay ON of motors star / delta
!
Time t1 (star) - time scale 0.1 s - 100 days devided into 10 time ranges
- rough time setting by rotary switch
!
Time t2 (delay) between
/
- time scale 0.1 s - 1 s
- fine time setting by potentiometer
EAN code
CRM-2T /UNI: 8595188112437
!
Voltage range: AC/DC 12 - 240 V
!
Output contact: 2x changeover / DPDT 16A
!
Output indication: multifunction red LED
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
R
Technical parameters
CRM-2T
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Supply indication:
Time scale:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (resistive):
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting / DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Terminal wire capacity:
1
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V/AC 50 - 60 Hz
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
t1: 0.1 s - 100 days, t2: 0.1 s-1 s
potentiometer
5% - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F (0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °)
2x changeover / DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
multifunction red LED
3x107
0.7x105
max. 150 ms
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
max.1x 2.5, 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
3 oz. (84 g)
UL E308660; EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Symbol
16 18 26 28
A1
A2
15
25
Connection
Start up of motor ( - )
(motor)
start of a motor
( )
S1
auxiliary voltage
( )
S2
S3
A1
A2
L1
CRM-2T
L2
25 26 28
15 16 18
( )
( )
S1
L3
S2
(motor)
S3
Description
Supply terminals
A1
A2
Output indication multifunction red
Supply indication
U
15-18
25-28
Rought time setting t1
Fine time setting t1
LED
t1
t2
24-480V
Fine time setting t2
25
26
28
Output contact
15
16
18
Output contact
Time ranges t1
Function
m
Delay ON star / delta
U
15-18
25-28
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
0.1 - 1 s
t1
m
t2
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
1 - 10 s
1 d
10
30
100
1 - 10 hrs
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
0.1 - 1 min
1 d
10
30
100
0.1 - 1 day
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
1 - 10 days
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
1 - 10 min
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
3 - 30 days
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
0.1 - 1 h
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
10 - 100 days
17
Asymmetric cycler CRM-2H
Cycler with independent adjustable switch ON/OFF
Used for regular room ventilation, cyclic dehumidification, light control, circulating pumps, illuminated advertising, etc.
! 2 time functions:
1) Cycler beginning with pulse
2) Cycler beginning with pause
! Function choice is done by an external jumper of terminals S-A1
! Time scale 0.1 s - 100 days devided into 10 time ranges:
(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 h / 1 hrs - 10 hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day / 1 day - 10 days /
3 days - 30 days / 10 days - 100 days)
! Rough time setting via rotary switch
! Voltage range: AC/DC 12 - 240 V
! Output contact: 1x changeover / SPDT 16 A
! Output indication: multifunction red LED
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
!
EAN code
CRM-2H /UNI: 8595188113007
R
Technical parameters
Symbol
CRM-2H
2 (function is chosen by connecting S-A1)
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 100 days
rotary switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F (0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C)
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Supply indication:
Time scale:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (resistive):
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Terminal wire capacity:
Dimensions:
Weight
Standards:
Connection
Cycler beginning with pulse
Cycler beginning with pause
(jumper S-A1)
Un
Un
16 18
A1
-
+
S 1x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
multifunction red LED
3x107
0.7x105
max. 150 ms
-
+
A1 S A2
A1 S A2
15 16 18
15 16 18
15
A2
Function
Cycler beginning with pulse
Cycler beginning with pause
U
15-18
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.3 oz. (65 g)
UL E308660; EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
t1
t2
t1
U
S
15-18
t2 t1
t2
t1
t2
t1 t2
Description
Supply terminals
A1
S A2
Terminal for function selection
Supply indication
Output indication multifunction LED
Rought time setting -IMPULSE
U
15-18 t1
LED
Fine time setting-IMPULSE
Rough time setting -PAUSE
t2
t1
Fine time setting -PAUSE
Time ranges
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
0.1 - 1 s
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
1 - 10 s
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
0.1 - 1 min
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
h
1 10
m
10
1
10
S1
1 - 10 min
1 d
10
30
100
0.1 - 1 h
15
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
1 - 10 hrs
18
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
0.1 - 1 day
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
1 - 10 days
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
3 - 30 days
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
10 - 100 days
16
18
Output contact
Multifunction time relay CRM-61
!
Multifunction time relay (6 functions and 6 time ranges), economic version of CRM-91H
!
To be used for electrical appliances, control of lights, heating, motors, pumps, fans, etc.
!
6 functions: - 3 time functions controlled by supply voltage
!
Easy to use function and time-range setting by rotary switches
!
Time scale 0.1 s - 10 hrs divided into 6 range:
- 3 time functions controlled by control input
(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 h rs / 1 hrs - 10 hrs)
EAN code
CRM-61 /UNI: 8595188120210
!
Universal voltage range: AC 24-240 V, DC 24 V
!
Output contact: 1x changeover 8 A / SPDT
!
Multifunction red LED output indicator flashes or shines depending on the status of output
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
R
Technical parameters
CRM-61
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Supply voltage:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Controlling
Control. voltage:
Control power input:
Load between S-A2:
Control. terminals:
Max. capacity of cable control:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
6
A1 - A2
AC 24 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) a DC 24 V
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 h
rotary switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F (0.01 % / °C, at = 20°C)
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Symbol
Connection
Un
A1
16 18
A2
A1
S S 15
A2
16
15
18
Function
1x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A/ AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
multifunction red LED
1x107
1x105
a
b
UNI
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W
Yes
A1-S
0.1μF
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
max. 120 ms
d
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
max. 2x 2.5, max. 1x4 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5, 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.4 oz. (69 g)
UL E308660; EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
i
e
k
U
Delay ON after energization
t
t
U
Delay OFF after energization
t
t
U
Cycler beginning with impulse after energization
t
t
t
t
t
t
Delay OFF after de-energization, instant make of output
S
t
S
t
Impulse relay with delay, press its delay ON and next press its
delay OFF output if it happens before expiration time
<t
t
S
Delay ON after make of the switch till break
t
t
Description
Supply terminals
Control input „S“
A2
A1
S
Supply indication
Output indication
CRM-61
Rought time setting
Fine time setting
Function setting
16
15
18
Output contact
19
Time relay with external potentiometer CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE
! Control by external control unit - potentiometer (can be placed / mounted for example on switch board doors or in panel)
! CRM-91HE: multifunction time relays
10 functions - 5 time functions controlled by supply voltage
- 4 time functions controlled by control input
- 1 function of latching relay
time scale 0.1 s - 10 days divided into 10 ranges
(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 hrs / 1 hrs - 10 hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day / 1 day 10 days / only ON / only OFF)
! CRM-2HE: asymmetric cycler
2 time functions - cycler beginning with pulse
- cycler beginning with gap
function selected via external wired link on control input S-A1
! CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE:
! Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V
! Output contact: 1x changeover 16 A / SPDT
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
! Possible to connect external potentiometer - max. distance 32.8 ft. (10 m) from relay
EAN code
CRM-91HE /UNI + potentiometr: 8595188142052
CRM-2HE /UNI + potetiometr: 8595188142069
Potentiometr for CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE : 8595188125215
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Controlling
Control. voltage:
Consumption of input:
Load between S-A2:
Control. terminals:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
CRM-91HE
10
2
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 days
0.1 s - 100 days
rotary switch, external potentiometer
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F (0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C)
Symbol
Potentiometer to CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE
CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE
A1
16
B1
18
B1
B2
B3
B4*
external control unit
A2
B2 B3
(B4)*
15
*B4 only for CRM-2HE
Connection
1x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
multifunction red LED
3x107
0.7x105
Description
CRM-91HE
Un
A1
S A2
Control input “S”
Supply voltage indication
A1
S Supply terminals
Intup for external time control
Output indication
-multifunction LED
A2
B1
B2
B3
Example of signaling
Rought time setting
Function: a U h
15-18
LED
Function setting
S
15-18
LED
Functions of CRM-91HE are identical with CRM-91H.
Functions of CRM-2HE are identical with CRM-2H.
t
Free position
16
15
18
Output contact
15 16 18
Supply terminals
Input for external
time contol - IMPULSE
CRM-2HE
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.7 oz. (77 g)
2.8 oz. (78 g)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
t
Function: e U
B1 B3 B2
UNI
AC 0.025-0.2VA / DC 0.1-0.7W
Yes
A1-S
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
max. 150 ms
Function
20
CRM-2HE
A1
Un
Setting of
IMPULSE
A1
S A2
B1 B3 B2
Control input “S”
Supply voltage indication
S A2
B1
B2
B3
Rought time
setting-IMPULSE
Rought time
setting-PAUSE
B1 B4 B2
Setting of
PAUSE
15 16 18
Output indication-multifunction LED
CRM-2HE
B1
15
16
B4
B2
Input for external
control time-PAUSE
18
Output contact
Potentiometer
Potentiometer:
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Weight:
Dimensions:
47 kΩ, linear
IP 65 from front side / IP 20 from back side
1.5 mm2 with sleeve / without sleeve max.2.5 (AWG 12)
0.5 oz. (15 g)
see page Accessories
Staircase switch CRM-4
!
Used for delayed switching of lights in the corridors, entrances, stairways, halls or for delayed finish of fans (WC,
bathroom, etc.)
!
It is controlled by a button or by several buttons from more places (connected in parallel)
!
Output relay contact 16 A/AC1 with surge current up to 80 A enables switching of el. bulbs and fluorescent lamps
!
Operating system switch:
AUTO - normal function according to set time
OFF - permanently OFF (e.g. when changing bulbs)
ON - permanently ON (e.g. while cleaning, servicing)
EAN code
CRM-4 /120V: 8595188155595
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Control
Control voltage:
Power on input:
Load between S-A2:
Control terminals:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting / DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
Time range: 0.5 - 10 min
!
Time setting by potentiometer
!
Supply voltage: AC 120 V
!
Protection against button blocking (e.g. a match inserted in a button)
!
1- MODULE, DIN rail mounting
CRM-4
delay off reacting to control contact switching
A1 - A2
AC 120 V / 50-60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.8 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.5 - 10 min
potentiometer
10 % - mechanical setting
5 % - set value stability
0.05 % / °F, at = 68 °F (0.05 % / °C, at = 20 °C)
1x changeover / SPDT (AgSnO2)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
AC 120 V
AC 0.53 VA
Yes
A1-S
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
max. 150 ms
Symbol
Connection
It is possible to connect load between S-A2 (e.g. contactor,
control of light or any other device), without disturbing a
correct function of relay (load is energized while the switch is ON).
16 18
A1
16 18
A1
S 15
A2
Un
A2
15
Circuit connection
3-wire connection
4- wire connection
L
L
N
N
A1 S A2
A1 S A2
250V / AC1
16A/4000VA
250V / AC1
16A/4000VA
15 16 18
15 16 18
Function
U
AUTO
OFF
position switches
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.2 oz. (62 g)
EN 60669-2-3, EN 61010-1
S load
ON
S
t
t
t
Description
Supply terminals
A1
S A2
Controlling contact
Output indication
Supply indication
Operating system swich
Time setting
15
16
18
Output contact
21
Multifunction time relay CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S
Multifunction time relay can be used for electrical appliances, control of lights, heating, motors, pumps and fans
(10 functions, 10 time ranges, multi-voltage, 16 A or 3x 8 A contacts)
! Fulfills all requirements for time relays
! 10 functions: - 5 time functions controlled by supply voltage
- 4 time functions controlled by control input
- 1 function of latching relay
! Comfortable and well-arranged function and time-range setting by rotary switches
! Time scale 0.1 s - 10 days divided into 10 ranges: (0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 hrs /
1 hrs - 10 hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day / 1 day - 10 days / only ON / only OFF)
! CRM-91H, CRM-93H: - universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V,
- output contact: CRM-91H: 1x changeover / SPDT 16 A; CRM-93H: 3 x changeover / SPDT 8 A
! CRM-9S: Universal supply voltage AC 12 - 240 V, absolutely noise-less switching
1x static contactless output (triac) 01.7 A (60A / < 10 ms), switches potential A1
! Multifunction red LED output indicator flashes or shines depending on the status of output
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
EAN code
CRM-91 /UNI:
CRM-93H /UNI:
CRM-9S /UNI:
8595188112420
8595188112468
8595188116008
CCA
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Voltage drop on switch:
Load on B1 terminal:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Controlling
Power on control input:
Load between S-A2:
Control. terminals:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
R
CRM-91H
CRM-93H
CRM-9S
10
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50-60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 days
rotary switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F (0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C)
Yes
A1-S
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
max. 150 ms
Connection
Un
CRM-91H
AC 12-240V (50-60Hz)
AC max. 0.35VA
-
+
S A1
16 18
A2
15
A1
S A2
15 16 18
1x changeover/SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 3x changeover/SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 1x static contactless output (triac)
0.7A
8A / AC1
16A / AC1
x
2000VA / AC1, 192W / DC
4000VA / AC1, 384W / DC
60A / < 10ms
10A / < 3s
30A / < 3s
x
250V AC1 / 24V DC
x
500mA
max. 0.9 V at I max.
x
Yes / I max. 0.7 A
x
multifunction red LED
> 108
3x107
>108
0.7x105
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W
Symbol
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA
Un
CRM-93H
A1
A1
S A2
16 18 26 28 36 38
35 36 38
25 26 28
S
A2
15
25
35
15 16 18
Possibility to connect load onto controlling input
It is possible to connect the load (e.g.: contactor) between terminals
S-A2, without any interruption of correct relay function.
max. 250 ms
16 18
A1
+
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C )
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
x
4kV (supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x 1.5 / with sleeve max. 1x 2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.26 oz. (64 g)
3.1 oz. (89 g)
1.8 oz. (51 g)
UL E308660 (for CRM-91H and CRM-93H); EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
-
+
Un
S A2
load
15
Un
CRM-9S
A1 /B1
S 18 18
A1 S A2
A2
B1 18 18
22
Multifunction time relay CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S
Function
On Delay (Power On)
When the input voltage U is applied, timing delay t begins. Relay contacts
R change state after time delay is complete. Contacts R return to their shelf
state when input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this
function.
a
Off Delay
When input voltage U is applied, relay contacts R change state immediately
and timing cycle begins. When time delay is complete, contacts return to
shelf state. When input voltage U is removed, contacts will also return to b
their shelfstate. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
Repeat Cycle (Starting Off )
When input voltage U is applied, time delay t begins. When time delay t
is complete, relay contacts R change state for time delay t. This cycle will
repeat until input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this
function.
c
Repeat Cycle (Starting On)
When input voltage U is applied, relay contacts R change state immediately
and time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, contacts return to d
their shelf state for time delay t. This cycle will repeat until input voltage U
is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
Off Delay (S Break)
Input voltage U must be applied continuously. When trigger switch S is
closed, relay contacts R change state. When trigger switch S is opened,
delay t begins. When delay t is complete, contacts R return to their shelf
state. If trigger switch S is closed before time delay t is complete, then time
is reset. When trigger switch S is opened, the delay begins again, and relay
contacts R remain in their energized state. If input voltage U is removed,
relay contacts R return to their shelf state.
e
Single Shot
Upon application of input voltage U, the relay is ready to accept trigger
signal S. Upon application of the trigger signal S, the relay contacts R
transfer and the preset time t begins. During time-out, the trigger signal S
is ignored. The relay resets by applying the trigger switch S when the relay
is not energized.
U
t
t
Single Shot Trailing Edge (Non-Retriggerable)
Upon application of input voltage U, the relay is ready to accept trigger signal
S. Upon application of the trigger signal S, the relay contacts R transfer and the
preset time t begins. At the end of the preset time t, the relay contacts R return to
their normal condition unless the trigger switch S is opened and closed prior to
time out t (before preset time elapses). Continuous cycling of the trigger switch
S at a rate faster than the preset time will cause the relay contacts R to remain
closed. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state.
U
t
t
U
t
t
t
t
t
U
t
t
t
t
t
t
S
t
t
t
t
g
S
t
h
S
Latching relay
Input voltage U must be applied continuously. Output changes state with
every trigger switch S closure. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts
R return to their shelf state.
i
S
Pulse generator
Upon application of input voltage U, a single output pulse of 0.5 seconds is
delivered to relay after time delay t. Power must be removed and reapplied
to repeat pulse. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
j
On/Off Delay
Input voltage U must be applied continuously. When trigger switch S is
closed, time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, relay contacts
R change state and remain transferred until trigger switch S is opened. If
input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state.
t
S
f
t
t
t
t
t
U
t
pulse
t
pulse
pulse = 0.5 s
Time ranges
m
10
1
h
1 10
10
S1
m
10
1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
0.1 - 1s
ON
OFF
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
1 - 10 hrs
h
1 10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
1 - 10 s
ON
OFF
10
1
0.1 - 1 min
ON
OFF
10
1
0.1 - 1 day
m
1 d
10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
h
1 10
h
1 10
10
S1
10
1
1 - 10 days
ON
OFF
m
1 d
10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
h
1 10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
1
1 - 10 min
10
S1
ON
OFF
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
only ON
h
1 10
10
S1
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
0.1 - 1 h
1 d
10
ON
OFF
only OFF
Description
Supply terminals
A1
S A2
Control input “S”
Supply indication
Output indication-multifunction LED
Examples of signaling
Rought time setting
Function: a U
15-18
LED
Fine time setting
Function setting
t
Function:e U
S
15-18
LED
15
16
t
18
Output contact
Notes
1) Output contacts of CRM-93H do not allow switching of different phases or 3-phase voltages (voltage > 250 V).
2) When mounting into steal-plated switchboards, it is necessary to keep a safety distance of min. 3 mm from terminal’s screws 35-36-38 and 25-26-28 towards the shutter of a switchboard.
23
Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B
!
Multifunction programmable digital relay with 4 digit red LED display
!
Control and setting are done by 3 buttons, user-friendly menu, absolute accuracy in timer setting, time countdown on
a display, galvanically separated START and STOP control inputs with UNI supply
EAN code
PDR-2A /UNI:
PDR-2B /UNI:
8594030333044
8594030333068
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Time ranges:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical strength (AC1):
Control
Control input Burden:
Control. impulse length:
Reset time:
Display - colour:
Number and height of digits:
Luminace:
Light wavelength:
Brightness setting:
Memory - memory locations:
Data stored for:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
24
PDR-2/A
!
Thanks to its complexity, it is possible to program also more demanding time functions by using 2 independent times
!
2 independent times, with combination of 2 inputs and 2 outputs
!
PDR-2/A: 16 functions, choice of functions of the other relay, 30 memory places for most frequently used times
!
PDR-2/B: 10 functions, 1 output of 10 functions can be assigned to each relay = 2 relays in one device
!
2 independent times in range: 0.01 s - 100 hrs
!
Supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
PDR-2/B
Symbol
16
10
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.5 - 2.5 VA / DC 0.4 - 2.5 W
-15 %; +10 %
0.01 s - 100 h
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F (0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C)
2x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
AC 0.01 - 0.25 VA
min. 1 ms / max. unlimited
max. 200 ms
red
4 positions with separating colon, height 0.39˝ (10 mm)
2200 - 3800 ucd
635 nm
range 20 - 100 % in 10 steps adjustable
30 (PDR-2/A) / 20 (PDR-2/B) for times ranges + service function
min. 10 years
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x 1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x 1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝ (90 x 52 x 65 mm)
5 oz. (143 g)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
A1
PDR-2
16 18 26 28
IN1
IN1
IN2
IN2
A2
15
25
Description
Control inputs
Supply terminals
Indication of time
(h, m, s)
Indication of
output status
Indication of operating
times (t1, t2)
Controlling buttons
26
25
28
18
15
16
Output 1
Output 2
Time data
Time range:
Minimal time step:
Time deviation:
Setting error:
Setting, reset accuracy:
Digital places:
0.01 s - 99 h 59 min 59 sec 99 ss
0.01 s
0.01 % of set value
0%
100 %
selected via program
Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B
Connection
PDR-2/A
PDR-2/B
START
input
Un
START input
for output (relay) 1
(t1)
Un
STOP
input
A1 A2 IN1 IN1 IN2 IN2
A1 A2 IN1 IN1 IN2 IN2
PDR-2
t1
PDR-2
h
t2
m
s
t1
out 1
mode
START input
for output (relay) 2 (t2)
stop
h
t2
m
s
out 1
out 2
start
mode
16 15 18 28 25 26
stop
start
out 2
16 15 18 28 25 26
output 1
output 2
16A AC1/250V 16A AC1/250V
output 1
output 2
16A AC1/250V 16A AC1/250V
Function
Functions for PDR-2/A and PDR-2/B
1. Delay ON
2. Delay OFF
3. Delay ON
after switching off control contact
4. Delay ON
by closing control contact
5. Delay OFF
after switching off control contact
6. Delay OFF
by closing control output
7. Delay OFF by opening control
contact with instant output
8. Delay OFF by closing control
contact with delayed output
9. Cycler beginning with impulse
10. Cycler beginning with pause
Functions for PDR-2/A
A1-A2
15-18
11. Cycler beginning with impulse with
A1-A2
variable interval
t1
A1-A2
15-18
15-18
12. Cycler beginning with pause with
A1-A2
variable interval
t1
15-18
A1-A2
START
15-18
13. Generator of impulse
t1
14. Changeover star/delta
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
15A. Shift of pulse by 2 times
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
15B. Shift of impulse by 2 times
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
16A. Extended impulse by 2 times
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
16B. Extended impulse by 2 times
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
A1-A2
15-18
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
A1-A2
15-18
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
A1-A2
START
15-18
t2
t1
t2
t1
t2
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
t2
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
t2
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
t2
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
t2
Recommendation:
PDR-2/B is replacing by 2 simple time relays = 2 in one.
25
Super-multifunction relay SMR-T, SMR-B
! Multifunction relay designed for installation into a wiring box or under wall-switch in an existing electrical installation
SMR-B
! Advantageous and fast solution for exchanging standard wall-switch for a switch controlled by time or for an impulse relay
controlled by a button
SMR-T
! More information about type and size of load for these products can be found on page 87 - 88
! SMR-T
- 3-wire connection, works without the connection of a neutral conductor
- power output: 10 - 160 VA
- between input S and neutral wire is possible connect any load R, L, or C - that is not necessary
! SMR-B
- 4-wire connection
- 10 functions
- output contact 1x16A / 4000 VA, 250V AC1
- enables switching of fluorescent lights and also energy saving lights
- suitable for switching loads greater than SMR-T, for example pulse relay, stair automatic switch, switching of ladder radiators
in bathrooms
- independent galvanically separated input AC/DC 5-250V, for example for control from a security system
Technical parameters
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Description
SMR-B
9
10
3-wire, without neutral
4-wire, with neutral
AC 120V / 50-60Hz
0.8 / 3VA
max 1 / 1VA
-15%; +10%
0.1 s - 10 days
via rotaty switch
10 % - mechanical setting
2 % - set value stability
0.1 % / °F, at = 68 °F (0.1 % / °C, at = 20 °C)
1 x triac
10 - 160 VA
10 - 100 VA
SMR-T
Exchangeable
fuse
Output indication
Rought time setting
Fine time setting
02x5
E S UF
Number of functions:
Connection:
Voltage range:
Power input (no operation / make):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Resistive load:
Inductive load:
Control
Control voltage:
Control current:
Impulse length:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree*:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Fuse:
Connection:
SMR-T
02x5
ESUF
EAN code
SMR-T/120V: 8595188155588
SMR-B/120V: 8595188155571
Function setting
1x NO-SPST (AgSnO2)
16A 125/250 V AC1
8A 250 V AC (cos φ > 0.4)
V
Output to appliance
Switch (button)
AC 120 V
Phase conductor
AC 120 V, UNI-5-250 V AC/DC
3 mA
min. 50ms / max. unlimited
SMR-B
+32.. +122 °F (0..+50°C)
any
free at connecting wires
IP30 in standard conditions
III.
2
Galvanically separated control
input 5-250 V AC/DC
Rought
time setting
F 1A / 250V
x
4x sol. wir., 0.75 mm2 (AWG 18)
2 x CY, 0.75mm2 (AWG 18)
3.5˝ (lenght 90 mm)
2 x CY, 2.5 mm2 (AWG 10)
1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝ (49 x 49 x 13 mm)
1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝ (49 x 49 x 21 mm)
0.92 oz. (26 g)
1.9 oz. (53 g)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
* for more information see page 32
Function
setting
Fine time setting
Output indication
Neutral
conductor
Switch (button)
Output to appliance
Phase conductor
Time ranges
m
10
1
h
1 10
10
S1
m
10
1
10
S1
26
ON
OFF
h
1 10
m
1 d
10
10
1
0.1 - 1 s
ON
OFF
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
1 - 10 hrs
h
1 10
10
S1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
m
1 d
10
10
1
1 - 10 s
ON
OFF
10
S1
m
1 d
10
0.1 - 1 day
h
1 10
10
1
10
S1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
m
1 d
10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
10
1
0.1 - 1 min
10
S1
m
10
1
1 - 10 days
h
1 10
10
S1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
m
1 d
10
10
1
1 - 10 min
ON
OFF
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
only ON
h
1 10
10
S1
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
0.1 - 1 hrs
1 d
10
ON
OFF
only OFF
Super-multifunction relay SMR-T, SMR-B
Function
Function a - delay OFF on entrering edge
output times when it is switched. Each following pressing (max. 5x)
increases time. Long pressing swithes output off.
S
V
Function b - delay OFF on downward edge
output times after button is swithed off, switches immediately
S
V
Function c - delay OFF on downward edge
after switching off output switches on and times
S
V
Function d - cycler - flasher impulsem
output cycles in regular interval, cycler starts with an impulse
S
V
Function e - puls shift
delay on after the switch is switched on and delay on after it is
switched off
>2s
t
2xt
Function f - delay ON
delay on after switch is switched on until it is switched off
t
S
V
t
t
Function g - impulse relay
switches on by a press, another pressing switches the output off. The
length of pressing doesn’t matter, it is possible to set reaction delay by a
potentiometer and thus eliminate rebound of a button
t
Function h - impulse relay with delay
one press switches on, another one switches the output off in case it is
done before the end of timing
S
V
Function i - cycler starting with pause
output cycles in regular intervals, cycler starts with a pause
S
V
t t t t t t
Function j* - cycler starting with gap
delay ON until switched off until it is de-energized or a switch is pressed again
Note: * Function j is valid only for SMR-B
S
V
t
t t t t t
S
V
S
V
t
t
t
t
t
Connection SMR-T, SMR-B
N
L
Note: SMR-T is not intended for switching capacity load (energy saving bulbs and LED lights with capacity
power etc.), these products are only intended for switching resistive and inductive loads (incandescent
bulbs, fans, etc.).
SMR-B with relay output is intended to other types of load. Using this output it is possible to switch the
load of R, L or C-values listed in the load table. Between inputs S and neutral wire is possible to connect
any load of R, L or C, however this is not condition.
V
L
N
S
S
L
V
SMR-
SMR-T
SMR-T: Fan controlling
depending on the lighting
Input for external control
voltage AC/DC 5-250 V
Example of connection SMR-T
Control of an appliance by button
neutral wire
L
incoming phase wire
AC 120 V
N
Output to an appliance AC 120 V
Original connection
Button
(switch)
N
neutral wire
L
incoming phase wire
Button
N
neutral wire
L
incoming phase wire
Switch
Output to an appliance
AC 120 V
After the light bulb switch is switched off, fan starts operating and after set time switches off.
27
Digital time switch clock SHT
Output
Time programm
This time switch clock SHT is used to control various appliances in
week
1 channel 2 channel day
real time; daily, weekly, monthly and yearly mode
SHT-1
! Switching: according the program (AUTO) / constantly manually,
SHT-1/2
SHT-3
manually to next program change / random (CUBE)
SHT-3/2
„Holiday
program”
option
to
choose
an
interval
when
the
device
!
doesn´t switch according to the standard program, but will be block during that time
! Automatic conversion summer / winter time
! Sealable cover of front panel, easy controlling via 4 buttons
! 100 memory places, clear LCD display, min. interval 1 s
! Voltage range: AC/DC 12-240 V
! Cyclic output
! Pulse output
! SHT-1, SHT-3: one channel version, 2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, clamp terminals
! SHT-1/2, SHT-3/2: two channel version, 2-MODULE, an individual program can be run on each channel
!
EAN code
SHT-1 /UNI:
SHT-1/2 /UNI:
SHT-3 /UNI:
SHT-3/2 /UNI:
8595188130431
8595188130417
8595188136754
8595188129046
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Back-up supply:
Summer/winter time:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Time circuit
Power back-up:
Accuracy:
Minimum interval:
Data stored for:
Cyclic output:
Pulse output:
Program circuit
Number of memory places:
Program (SHT-1; SHT-1/2):
Program (SHT-3; SHT-3/2):
Data readout:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Polution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
SHT-1, SHT-3
SHT-1/2, SHT-3/2
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.5 - 2 VA / DC 0.4 - 2 W
-15 %; +10 %
yes
automatic
1x changeover/SPDT (AgSnO2) 2x changeover/SPDT (AgSnO2)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
> 3x107
> 0.7x105
up to 3 years
max. ±1s / day at 73.4 °F (23 °C)
1 min
min. 10 years
1-99s
1-99s
100
daily, weekly
daily, weekly, monthly, yearly (up to year 2095)
LCD display, with back light
year
Symbol
SHT-1
SHT-3
A1
16 18
A2
15
SHT-1/2
SHT-3/2
A1
A2
16 18 26 28
15
25
Connection
SHT-1
SHT-3
SHT-1/2
SHT-3/2
A1 16 15 18
A1 16 15 18
Un
Un
A2
A2 26 25 28
Description of displayed elements on the screen
the choice of switching mode
indication (1st channel)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Auto Prog Man
shows the day in the week
indication of the pulse / cyclic output
indication (2nd channel)
AM / PM
shows summer / winter mode
indication of switching
hour of the day
channel 2 (bargraph)
7
output ON/OFF
random switching mode
0
6
12
18
24
manual switching mode
channel 1 (bargraph)
Description
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 10 clips, IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x1.4˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 35.6 x 64 mm)
4.6 oz. (130 g)
5 oz. (143 g)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Supply terminals (A1)
Output - channel 1
(16-15-18)
A1
18
15
16
7
Auto
Transparent cover
Display
12
6
0
SHT-3
MAN2
MAN 1
Reset
PRG
+
RESET
OK
ESC
Controlling buttons
-
Sealing spot
A2
Supply terminals (A2)
28
month
26
25
28
Output - channel 2 (26-25-28)
only for SHT-1/2, SHT-3/2
Auxiliary and Power relays
VS
VS116U
VS308U
Supply voltage:
AC/DC 12-240 V
Output contact:
1x changeover / SPDT 16 A.
Supply voltage:
AC/DC 12-240 V
Output contacts:
3x changeover / TPDT 8 A.
VS316/24
VS316/120
Supply voltage:
AC/DC 24 V
Output contacts:
3x changeover / TPDT 16 A,
possibility to be connected
into 3-phase circuit.
Supply voltage:
AC 120 V
Output contacts:
3x changeover / TPDT 16 A,
possibility to be connected
into 3-phase circuit.
Overview table
AC/DC 12..240 V
VS316/24
1M-DIN
AC/DC 24 V
VS316/120
1M-DIN
AC 230 V
Page of catalogue
1M-DIN
Designation
VS308U
1x16 A changeover/
SPDT
3x8 A changeover/
TPDT
3x16 A changeover/
TPDT
3x10 A changeover/
TPDT
Paralel diode
AC/DC 12..240 V
RC unit
Coil voltage
1M-DIN
LED signal light
Design
VS116U
Output contact
Type
Other features
as a separation relay (4kV), direct switching of appliances up to 4000VA
(e.g. heaters), well visible signalization, noiseless
30
a “multiplication” of contacts, 3x changeover contact/ 3PDT only in 1-MODULE,
well visible signalization, noiseless
30
3x changeover contact in 1-MODULE, possibility of “multiplication” of contacts and
in the same time possibility of switching high output, possibility of 3 phase switching
30
as VS316/24, but AC 230V
30
More about contact loadability on page 87-88.
29
Power relays modular type VS
!
Power relay used for switching larger load output, strengthen or „multiplying“ contacts of the existing device
Type
VS116U
VS308U
VS316/24
VS316/120
Current rating
16 A
8A
16 A
16 A
Number of contacts Design
DIN (1M)
1
DIN (1M)
3
DIN (1M)
3
DIN (1M)
3
Supply terminals
A1 - A2 12- 240V AC/DC
A1 - A2 12-240V AC/DC
A1 - A2 24V AC/DC
A1 - A2 120V AC
!
Relays VS316/24, VS316/120 enable connection to a 3-phase circuit
!
In the design 1-MODULE , DIN rail mounting, output status indicated by high intensity LED with choice of LED color
(red, green, yellow, blue or white LED*)
R
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Time between switching:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
VS116U
VS308U
VS316/24
VS316/120
VS116U
A1 - A2
AC/DC 24 V/ 50-60 Hz
AC/DC 12-240 V/ 50-60 Hz
1.6 VA/ 1.2 W
AC 0.7 - 3 VA/ DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15%; +10%
AC/DC 12-240 V/ 50-60 Hz
AC 0.7 - 3 VA/ DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
1x changeover / SPDT (AgSnO2) 3x changeover/TPDT (AgNi /Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
8 A / AC1
4000VA / AC1, 384W/ DC
2000VA/ AC1, 192W/ DC
30 A / < 3s
10 A / < 3s
Symbol
A1
AC 120 V/ 50-60 Hz
2.5 VA
3x changeover / TPDT (AgSnO2)
16A / AC1
4000VA / AC1, 384W/ DC
30 A / < 3s
12
A2
14
11
VS308U
A1
12
14 22
24 32
34
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
high intensity of LED
3x107
0.7x105
min. 2s
2.05 oz. (58 g)
50 ms
20 ms
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C )
4 kV (supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5, max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.9 oz. (83g)
3.17 oz. (90 g)
UL E308660 (for VS116U and VS308U); EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1
11
A2
1x107
1x105
21
31
VS316/24
A1
12
14 22
11
A2
24 32 34
21
31
VS316/120
A1
3.3 oz. (92g)
12
A2
14 22
11
24 32 34
21
31
EAN codes
VS116U /red
VS116U /green
VS116U /yellow
VS116U /white
VS116U /blue
8595188124607
8595188136433
8595188138499
8595188138482
8595188138475
VS308U /red
VS308U /green
VS308U /yellow
VS308U /white
VS308U / blue
8595188130103
8595188136440
8595188138529
8595188138512
8595188138505
VS316 /24 red
VS316 /24 green
VS316 /24 yellow
VS316 /24 white
VS316 /24 blue
8595188135771
8595188136105
8595188136129
8595188136099
8595188136112
Notes
Max. time of changeover of contact is 10ms.
VS316/24 or VS316/120 enables switching of different phases or 3 phase voltage.
* Possibility to choose blue, white and yellow color of LED for power relays line VS in case of minimal order quantity 100 pcs.
30
VS316 /120 red
VS316 /120 green
VS316 /120 yellow
VS316 /120 white
VS316 /120 blue
8595188155656
8595188155670
8595188155687
8595188155649
8595188155663
Power relays modular type VS
Description
VS116U
VS308U
Supply terminals
A2
A1
A1
Supply terminals
2nd output
changeover contact
A2
21
22
24
Indication LED
Indication LED
Red/Červená
Red/Červená
11
12
11
14
Output changeover contact
31
32
12
14
1st output
changeover contact
34
3rd output
changeover contact
VS316/24, VS316/120
21
22
2nd output changeover contact
Supply terminals
24
A1
A2
Indication LED
11
12
14
Output changeover contact
31
32
34
3rd output changeover
contact
31
Dimmers
R, L, C
MODULAR
MINI
AC 120V / 60Hz
DIM-15
LIC-2
SMR-M
Designated for dimming
of:
dimmable energy saving
fluorescent lamps,
LED lamps.
R,L,C, - resistive, inductive
and capacitive loads.
Serves to dim
monochrome LED strips
and RGB LED strips with
power supply 24 V DC
which are
current-controlled.
For mounting under a wallswitch into an installation
box KU-68 (or similar).
Dimmable energy saving
fluorescent lamps,
LED lamps.
R,L,C, - resistive, inductive
and capacitive loads.
Overview table
AC 100-240V
x
x
x
300 W
300 W
300 W
160 W
160 W
160 W
DIM-15
1M-DIN
AC 120V
2x
MOSFET
SMR-M
BOX
AC 120V
2x
MOSFET
x
x
010V / 110V
C
DALI, CIB, DMX
L
OFFDIMMER
Output unit
R
2x
MOSFET
ONDIMMER
LED LED lamps
capacitive (electronic
transformers)
energy saving
inductive (wound
transformers)
C
uorescent
ESL fllamps
resistive (el. bulbs,
halogen lights)
L
Rated load
Catalogue page
1M-DIN
R
Method of phase
Control principal
regulation
Output
Designation
LIC-2
Supply voltage
Type
Design
Type of dimmed load
control unit for dimmers or electronic ballasts with analog control
0-10 V / 1-10 V
33
x
x
designated for dimming of: R, L, C, ESL, LED
x
x
designated for dimming of: R, L, C, ESL, LED
34
34
Key to symbols
type of load
bulbs,
halogen lamps
low-voltage el.bulbs 12/24V low-voltage el.bulbs 12/24V
wound transformers
electronic transformers
ESL dimmable compact
fluorescent lamps
LED lamps
ESL
LED
(symbols)
R
L
C
Demonstrated symbols are informative.
Expandatory:
R, L, C
Dimmer with designated load:
R - RESISTIVE
L - INDUCTIVE
C - CAPACITIVE
ESL - energy saving lamps
LED - LED bulbs
IPxx protection - under normal conditions: normal conditions are understood as such conditions of operating an electrical device, installation and power
supply network for which the entire device is designed, produced and installed. Upon these normal conditions of use and upon normal maintenance, all
protective devices must be effective throughout the entire expected service life of the product.
Recommendation for mounting:
Recommendation for mounting modular dimmers: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module (approx. 0.4” / 9 mm) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of
the device.
32
Lighting intensity controller LIC-2
Mounting of SKS photosensor on
the wall
! serves as control unit for dimmers or electronic ballasts with analog control 0-10 V / 1-10 V
! one control unit LIC-2 can control up to 50 electronic ballasts
! keeps a preset lighting intensity (automatic regulation)
NEW!
! control operating modes using existing button
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Supply voltage:
Consumption apparent / loss:
Power supply indication:
Control
Button - control terminals:
Control voltage:
Impulse length:
Button - control terminals:
Duration of control pulse:
Output 1
Analog:
Terminals:
Galvanically separated:
Output 2
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Switching capacity:
Peak current:
Switching voltage:
Min. switching capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Ingress protection:
Overvoltage category:
Contamination degree:
Connecting cond.cross-section (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Mounting of SKS photosensor into the
panel
LIC-2
Connection
Symbol
L-N
AC 120 V / 60 Hz
max. 2.7 VA / 1.4 W
green LED
lighting sensor
+
L-T
AC 100-240 V
min. 80 ms / max. unlimited
A1 - B
min. 80 ms / max. unlimited
0 - 10V / 10mA max. or 1 - 10 / 10mA max.
OUT-1, OUT-2
Yes
IN1
IN2
OUT+
OUT-
controlled
dimmer or
ballast
B L OUT1
–
L
IN1
N
V
IN2
T N OUT2
V
L
N B
T
blocking
EAN code
LIC-2/120V: 8595188155700
SKS photosensor: 8594030337288
switch OFF
automatic regulation
cleaning (maximum illumination level)
! setting the basic parameters of lighting is performed by potentiometers
min. brightness of illumination
maximum illumination level
speed of dimming / illumination
! blocking the automatic control using external signal
! power supply AC 120 V
L
N
1x switching (AgSnO2)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
Device description
Inputs for illumination sensor
Analog output OUT1 (+)
IN1
IN2
Analog output OUT2 (-)
-
+
Output mode indication
Supply voltage indication
P1 -operating mode settings
P2 - brightness settings
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-4 °F to 140 °F (-20 to +60 °C)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.8 oz. (78g)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1, EN 60929
Operating mode settings
MIN - setting of min. brightness level (so energy-saving lamps do not go out
during regulation).
RUN - automatic regulation of lighting (brightness is maintained at the set value
and regulated using an illumination sensor).
SET - setting of the required level of illumination for automatic regulation.
In position SET and MIN, the brightness level is set by potentiometer P2 (green LED also flashes). If
the required brightness level is attained, the trimmer P1 is set to the RUN position. The brightness
level is thereby set (green LED lights up permanently).
Period of brightness
increase / decrease
Selection 0 - 10V / 1 - 10V
Relay output
Supply voltage L
V
L
Supply voltage N
Control input T
N
B
T
Blocking input B
Funkce
Control button functions
- short press (< 0.5s) - always switches off output (relay
and output voltage)
- longer press (0.5...3s) - runs automatic regulation of
brightness level (according to sensor)
- long press (> 3s) - sets the max. brightness level
(CLEANING mode).
Blocking input function
- switches off lighting - only in automatic regulation
mode (has no influence in CLEANING mode), e.g. for
central switching off of lighting
Output relay
- switches on always upon switching on the lighting
using the button if the DC output voltage is greater
than 0.1V (for the mode 0-10V) or 1V (for the mode
1-10V)
- upon switching off the light, the relay opens if the
output voltage drops below the stated limits
Red LED
- illuminates upon active ouput (at any brightness level)
- flashes upon activation of blocking
33
Controlled dimmer DIM-15, SMR-M
Designed for dimming of: a) R - bulbs, halogen lamps
b) L - low-voltage el.bulbs 12/24V wound transformers
c) C - low-voltage el.bulbs 12/24V electronic transformers
d) ESL - dimmable compact fluorescent lamps
e) LED - LED lamps
! Enables gradual setting of luminance by push-button (non-detent) or parallel buttons
! Returns to last state upon re-energization
! Type of light source is set by switch-over on the front panel of device
! Minimal luminance, set by potentiometer on the front panel, eliminates flashing of some types of saving fluorescent lamps
! Supply voltage 120V AC
DIM-15
! Output status is indicated by red LED:
- shines when output is active
-flashes while heating overload, at the same time output is disconnected
! 1-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting, saddle terminals
SMR-M
! Button-controlled dimmer intended to be installed in an installation box into the existing electrical wiring
! Protection against excessive temperature inside the device - switches off the output
!
AC 120V / 60Hz
EAN code
DIM-15/120V: 8595188155601
SMR-M/120V: 8595188155618
DIM-15
SMR-M
Technical parameters
DIM-15
SMR-M
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Operating range:
Apparent power:
Loss power:
Dissipated power:
Supply indication:
Control
Control terminals:
Control wire:
Control voltage:
Control input power:
Control impulse lenght:
Output
Contactless:
Load:
Output status indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
A1 - A2
x
x
4-wire, with neutral
Overvoltage category:
Pollution level:
Terminal wire capacity (mm2):
Connection:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Symbol
A1 (L)
DIM-15
(SMR-M)
AC 120 V / 60 Hz
-15 %; +10 %
max. 1.5VA
max. 0.7W
green LED
V T(S) A2(N)
A1 - T
x
x
L-S
Light source type setting
AC 230 V
AC 0.3-0.6 VA
min. 80 ms / unlimited
2 x MOSFET
300 W (at cos φ =1)*
red LED
160 W (at cos φ =1)*
x
Connection
-4 °F to 95 °F (-20 °C to +35 °C)
-4 °F to 140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
free at connecting wires
IP 40 from front panel /
IP30 in standard
IP 10 clips
conditions**
III.
2
max. 2x2.5, with sleeve max. 1x2.5,
max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
x
solid w. CY, 0.75 mm2 (AWG 18),
x
lenght 90 mm (3.5˝)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝ (49 x 49 x 21 mm)
1.98 oz. (57 g)
1.3 oz. (38 g)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1
* Due to a large number of light source types, the maximum load depends on the internal construction of dimmable light
sources and their power factor cos φ.
The power factor of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs ranges from cos φ = 0.95 to 0.4.
An approximate value of maximum load may be obtained by multiplying the load capacity of the dimmer by the power
factor of the connected light source.
DIM-15
L
A1
V
T 2.5.A
recommended
back-up fuse
A2
T
N
SMR-M
L
N
** for more information see page 32
T 1.6 A
recomended
fuse
V
34
L
N
S
Controlled dimmer DIM-15, SMR-M
Device describtion
Output
Supply voltage L
V
A1
Supply voltage
indication
Output indication
Light source
type selection
Light source
type selection
Minimal luminance
setting
Minimal luminance setting
Supply voltage
indication
Switch (button)
A2
Output to an appliance
Phase
T
Neutral
Controlling input
Supply voltage N
Functions and controlling
! short button press (< 0.5s)
turns the light off or on
! long press (> 0.5s) enables slight regulation of light intensity
Supplying Un
> 0.5s
< 0.5s
< 0.5s
> 0.5s
< 0.5s
T
! setting of minimal luminance is possible only during decreasing of luminance by long button press
! setting of minimal luminance by saving fluorescent lamps serves for harmonizing of lowest light intensity prior its
unprompted switching off
V
min
max
max
V
min
Luminance setting:
„LED, R, L, C“:
! if the light is turned off, short press (< 0.5s) switches the light onto last set luminance level
„Energy saving lamp“:
! when light is off, short impulse turns lamp on and then luminance is decreased to set level
Connection example
N
L
SM R - M
SNLV
Additional information
! it is not possible to dim energy-saving lamps without marking: dimmable
!an incorrect setting of light source has effect only on dimming range, it means neither dimmer or load get damaged
! max. number of dimmable light sources depends on their internal structure
35
Notes
36
Power supplies
Voltage
Stabilized DC- switching
12V
PSB-10-12
PS-30-12
PS-100-12
IN: AC 100-250 V
OUT: DC 12V stabil
LOAD: 0.84 A / 10 W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
-MINI, into an installation
box (such as KU-68)
IN: AC 100-250 V
OUT: DC 12 V stabil
LOAD: 2.5 A / 30 W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
3 MODULE
IN: AC 100-253 V
OUT: DC 12 V stabil
LOAD: 8,4 A / 100 W
- galvanically separated
- fusion safety
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
6 MODULE
Regulated
24V
PSB-10-24
PS-30-24
PS-100-24
IN: AC 100-250 V
OUT: DC 24 V stabil
LOAD: 0.42 A / 10W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
MINI, into an installation
box
IN: AC 100-250 V
OUT: DC 24 V stabil
LOAD: 1.25 A / 30W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
3 MODULE
IN: AC 100-253 V
OUT: DC 12 V stabil
LOAD: 4,2 A / 100 W
- fusion safety
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
6 MODULE
PS-30-R
IN: AC 100-253 V
OUT: DC 12-24 V
regul., stab.
LOAD: 2.5-1.25 A / 30W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
3 MODULE
Overview table
# DC 12 V 0.84 A
S
x
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage
12 V / 10 W, box
38
38
Electronic
fuse
Short-circuitproof
#
Safety fuse
x
Switching (S) /
Linear (L)
Stabilized
Output current
DC
Output voltage
AC
Input voltage
MINI-BOX AC 100-250V
Page in catalogue
PSB-10-24
Design
Type
PSB-10-12
Designation
Protection against
overload
Output
#
MINI-BOX AC 100-250V
x
#
# DC 24V 0.42 A
S
x
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage
24 V / 10 W, box
PS-30-12
3M-DIN
AC 100-250V
x
#
# DC 12 V 2.5 A
S
#
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage
12 V / 30 W, 3 module
38
PS-30-24
3M-DIN
AC 100-250V
x
#
# DC 24V 1.25 A
S
#
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage
24 V / 30 W, 3 module
38
PS-30-R
3M-DIN
AC 100-250V
x
#
# DC 12-24V 2.5 A1.25A
S
#
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage
12-24 V / 30 W, 3 module
38
PS-100-12
6M-DIN
AC 100-253V
x
#
# DC 12 V 8.4 A
S
#
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage
12 V / 100 W, 6 module
38
PS-100-24
6M-DIN
AC 100-253V
x
#
# DC 24V
S
#
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage
24V / 100W, 6 module
38
4.2 A
37
Power supplies PS range
!
PSB-10: switching stabilized power supplies with fixed output voltage, for mounting into an installation box
PSB-10-12 - stabilized power supply 12V/10W
PSB-10-24 - stabilized power supply 24V/10W
!
PS-30: switching stabilized power supplies, version 3-module
PS-30-12 - stabilized power supply with fixed output voltage 12 V/30 W
PS-30-24 - stabilized power supply with fixed output voltage 24 V/30 W
PS-30-R – stabilized regulated power supply 12-24 V/30 W
!
PS-100: stabilized power supply with fixed output voltage, version 6-module
PS-100-12 - stabilized power supply 12 V/100 W
PS-100-24 - stabilized power supply 24 V/100 W
PSB-10-24
!
EAN code
shot time interval it again switches on.
PS-30-12V: 8595188137966
PS-30-24V: 8595188139045
PS-30-R: 8595188136655
PSB-10-12: 8595188145022
PSB-10-24: 8595188143783
PS-100-12V: 8595188137195
PS-100-24V: 8595188139021
Technical parameters
PSB-10-12
Input
Voltage range:
Burden without load (max.):
Burden with full load (max.):
Protection:
Output
Output voltage DC / max. current:
Output current is limited by electronic fuse, in case maximal current is exceeded, the device switches off and after a
!
Indication of output voltage by green LED on front panel (except PSB-10)
!
Temperature protection – if temperature is exceeded, the device switches off and after cooled down, it switches on again
PSB-10-24
PS-30-12
AC 110 - 250V / 50-60Hz
3VA / 0.5W
26VA / 13W
x
12V / 0.84A
Tolerance of output voltage:
Output indication:
Wave of off-load output voltage:
Wave of output voltage with max
load:
Time delay after connection:
Time delay after over-load:
Efficiency:
Electronic fuse:
Other information
Working humidity:
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength input- output:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Polutioon degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Outlets:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
9VA / 1W
24V / 0.42A
PS-30-24
PS-30-R
AC 100-250V / 50-60Hz
10VA /1.5W
70VA / 37W
fuse T2A
12.2V / 2.5A
PS-100-12
10VA / 1.7W
12.2V / 2.5A
24.2V / 1.25A
± 3%
green LED
24.2V / 1.25A
PS-100-24
AC 100-253V / 50-60Hz
12VA / 2W
195VA / 121W
fuse T 3.15A
12.2V / 8.4A
24.2V / 4.2A
± 2%
± 2%
x
± 2%
40mV
30mV
40mV
1V
380mV
max. 1s
max. 1s
> 75%
80mV
max. 5s
500mV
max. 1s
40mV
max. 3s
max. 0.5s
> 82%
max. 1s
> 82%
> 81%
electronic protections short-circuit, over load, over voltage (from 120% of rated output)
20 .. 90% RH
-4 °F to 104°F (-20 °C to +40 °C)
-40 °F to 185 °F (-40 °C to +85 °C )
-13 °F to 158 °F (-25 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV
IP40 device / IP20 in-built in distribution board
II.
2
solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x1.5 (AWG 12)
x
3.5˝x 2.1˝x 2.6˝ (90 x 52 x 65 mm)
3.5˝x 4.1˝x 2.6˝ (90 x 105 x 65 mm)
12.9 oz. (367 g)
5.6 oz. (158 g)
EN 61204-1, EN 61204-3, EN 61204-7
-40 °F to 185 °F (-40 °C to +85 °C )
IP30
x
solid wire CY, 4x0.75mm2, 3.5˝ (90mm) (AWG 18)
1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝ (48 x 48 x 21 mm)
2.5 oz. (70 g)
Connection
PSB-10-12
(PSB-10-24)
AC 110-250 V
50 Hz / 60 Hz
N
L
AC
PS-30-12
(PS-30-24)
PS-30-R
AC 100 - 250 V
50 Hz / 60 Hz
N
L
AC
DC
+
-
DC 12 V / 0.84A
(DC 24 V / 0.42A)
38
AC 100 - 250 V
50 Hz / 60 Hz
N
L
+
-
DC 12 V / 2.5A
(DC 24 V / 1.25A)
AC 184-253 V
50 Hz / 60 Hz
N
L
AC
AC
DC
PS-100-12
(PS-100-24)
DC
DC
+
-
DC 12 V - 24 V /
2.5 -1.25A
+
-
DC 12 V / 8.4A
(DC 24 V / 4.2A)
Power supplies PS range
Connection
PSB-10-12
Neutral
Output voltage
Phase
Output voltage
PSB-10-12 / PSB-10-24
designated for installation into an installation box. Suitable for controlling of lighting sources, thermo valves, shutter engines, etc.
PS-30-12
PS-30-R
Supply terminals
Supply terminals
N
L
N
Output voltage
indication
L
Output
voltage indication
Setting
output voltage
+
+
+
\ -
-
-
+
Output voltage terminals
Output voltage terminals
+
+
\ -
Output voltage terminals
-
-
Output voltage terminals
PS-100-12
Output voltage terminals
Supply terminals
N
-
-
-
-
L
Output
voltage
indication
+
Output voltage
terminals
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
Output voltage
terminals
39
Twilight switches
SOU
96x62x34
IP65
SOU-1
SOU-3
Twilight switch.
Voltage range:
AC/DC 12-240 V
Output contact:
1x changeover / SPDT 16 A.
Twilight and light
switch
Voltage range:
AC 120 V / 50-60 Hz
Output conatct:
1x NO / SPST 16 A.
Accessories
of twilight switches:
Photosensor SKS
Protection degree: IP56.
It is suitable for mounting on the wall or
in panel.
Memory relays
MR
MR-41
MR-42
Voltage range:
AC/DC 12 -240 V
Output contact:
1x changeover / SPDT
16 A.
Voltage range:
AC/DC 12 -240 V
Output contact:
2x changeover / DPDT
16 A.
x
x
Designation
x
External sensor
x
Is used to control lights on the basis of ambient light intensity
41
Is used to control lights on the basis of ambient light intensity
42
40
1
2
Designation
Function
1M-DIN
1x16 A changeover
2x16 A changeover
Control output
MR-42
AC/DC 12-240V
(AC 50-60 Hz)
AC/DC 12-240V
(AC 50-60 Hz)
LED indication
1M-DIN
Output contact
Design
MR-41
Power supply
Type
Other
Latching relays, controlled by buttons from several locations can replace three
way switches or cross bar switches thanks to control by buttons (unlimited
number, connected in parallel by 2 wires), installation gets more transparent and
faster for mounting.
Page of catalogue
x
Internal sensor
IP65
1x16 A changeover
1x16 A NO-SPST
Display
SOU-3
AC/DC 12-240V
(AC 50-60 Hz)
AC 120 V
(AC 50-60 Hz)
LED indication
1M-DIN
Output contact
Design
SOU-1
Power supply
Type
Other
Page of catalogue
Overview table
43
43
Twilight switch SOU-1
Mounting of photosensor SKS on the wall
Mounting of photosensor SKS
into the panel
EAN codes:
!
Is used to control lights on the basis of ambient light intensity
!
Used for switching street illumination and garden lights, illumination of advertisements, shop windows, etc.
!
Level of ambient intensity is monitored by an external sensor and output is switched according to set level on the device
!
Control input for additional control, e.g. time switch, preswitch etc.
!
Level of illumination adjustable in two ranges: 1 - 100 lx and 100 - 50000 lx
!
Adjustable time delay to eliminate short term fluctuation in illumination
!
External sensor IP56 suitable for mounting on the wall (cover and holder of a sensor are a part of the package)
!
Supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V
!
Output contact: 1x changeover / SPDT 16 A
!
Red LED output indication
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
SOU-1/UNI + photosensor SKS: 8595188121019
Photosensor SKS:
8594030337288
Technical parameters
SOU-1
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time delay:
Time delay setting:
Illumination rang 1):
Illumination rang 2):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Control
Power the control input:
Load between S-A2:
Control. terminals:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Sensor cable length:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions of the sensor SKS:
Weight of sensor SKS:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50-60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0 - 2 min
potentiometer
1 - 100 lx
100 - 50000 lx
1x changeover / SPDT (AgSnO2)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
0.8 - 530 mVA
Yes
A1-S
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
150 ms
Symbol
Connection
L
A1
16
N
18
A1 S A2
IN
IN
IN
S A2
15
15 16 18
Function
Description of DIP switch
DIP 1 - LUX
ON
ambient light
intensity
100 - 50000 lx
1 - 100 lx
LEVEL
lx
Hysteresis
A1-A2
DIP 2 - TEST
ТЕSТ
S
15-18
ON
ТЕSТ ON
NORMAL
t
t
Description
Supply voltage terminals
Terminals for sensor
A1
S A2
IN
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C )
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C )
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
max. 50 m (standard wire)
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
see page 93
0.7 oz. (20 g)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.6 oz. (75 g)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
IN
IN
Terminal of blocking input
Output indication
Supply voltage indication
Switch of test function TEST
Setting of level of
illumination
Fine setting of level of
illumination
Setting time delay
15
16
18
Output contact
41
Twilight light switch SOU-3
!
!
96x62x34
IP65
!
!
!
!
EAN code
SOU-3/120V: 8595188155625
!
SOU-3
Technical parameters
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Input (apparent / loss):
Setting the scale level of lighting
Function (twilight switch)
- range 1:
- range 2:
- range 3:
Function (light switch)
- range 1:
- range 2:
- range 3:
Setting function
Level of light-slight:
Slight setting of light level:
Time delay t:
Delay setting t:
Output
Output contact:
Current rating:
Switching output:
Peak current:
Switched voltage:
Min.switching output:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life:
Other information
Operation temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh:
Operation position:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution level:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Suggested power-supply cable:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
Is used as control of the device on the basis of ambient light intensity
External version in IP65, box for mounting on the wall, front cover removable without screws
Built in high resolution light sensor
Two devices in one, function is set by jumper:
- twilight switch – contact closes by decreasing of ambient light intensity, and opens by its increasing
- light switch – contact closes by increasing ambient light intensity, and opens by decreasing light
intensity. Used for switching of devices by reaching of pre-set ambient light level, usually sun shine
(pulling down the shutters or blinds, activation of solar panels)
3 adjustable (by jumper) ranges of light level
3 adjustable levels of time delay (for elimination of short-term fluctuations of light intensity – for short
increases in light intensity)
Supply voltage 120 V AC
Potential-free output contact 12A/AC1 switching
Description (proportion is accordant to real size)
L-N
AC 120V / 50-60Hz
- 15% .. +10%
max 6VA / 0.7W
by jumper J2
Cable gommet M16x1.5
for cable max. Ø 0.4” (10 mm)
Hole for mounting on the
wall Ø 0.2” (4.3 mm)
1 ... 10 lx
10 ... 100 lx
100 ... 1.000 lx
100 ... 1 000 lx
1 000 ... 10 000 lx
10 000 ... 100 000 lx
by jumper J3
0.1 ... 1 x range
potenciometer
0 / 1 min. / 2 min.
by jumper J1
SOU-3
L
N
L
15
18
J1
Delay
(min)
1 x NO- SPST (AgSnO2)
12 A / AC1
3000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC / 24 V DC
500 mW
3 x 107
0.7 x 105
J2
Adjustable range
setting (lx)
10
100
1.000
0
1
2
J3
Function
light switch
twilight switch
1.000
10.000
100.000
Fine adjustment within the range
-22 °F to 140 °F (-30 °C to +60 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4kV (supply-output)
sensor-side down or on the sides
IP65
III.
2
max.1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12)
CYKY 3x2.5 (CYKY 4x1.5)
3.8˝ x 2.4˝ x 1.3˝ (96 x 62 x 34 mm)
4.3 oz. (122 g)
EN 60255-6, 61010-1
Hole for mounting on the
wall Ø 0.2” (4.3 mm)
Sensor of ambient light
Connection
Function
L
N
L
N
potentialless
NO contacts
jumper for L
potential
L
15
18
L
N
L
15
18
Actual
illumination level
Setup
illumination level
3- wiring connection
4- wiring connection
Solid
hysteresis 12%
L-N
Function
twilight switch
15 - 18
Function
light switch
15 - 18
42
t
t
t
t
t
Device is standardly supplied with jumper L-15 (3-wire connection).
For the correct function of device is neccesary sensor-side down device mounting.
L
N
Memory & latching relays MR-41, MR-42
! Latching relays, controlled by buttons from several locations can replace three way switches or cross bar switches
thanks to control by buttons (unlimited number, connected in parallel by 2 wires), installation gets more transparent
and faster for mounting
! Relays MR-41/UNI, MR-42/UNI memorize its last state even after supply failure. During the failure relay will turn off and
after re-energizing will automatically turns on
! MR-41
- output contact: 1x changeover / SPDT 16 A
! MR-42
- options - 2x parallel contacts or the other relay is latching
- function selected via external jumper between B1 - B2
- output contact: 2x changeover / DPDT 16 A
EAN code
MR-41 /UNI: 8595188115896
MR-42 /UNI: 8595188115919
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Controlling
Consumption of input:
Load between A2-ON/OFF:
Control. terminals:
Impulse length:
Other data
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
! Supply voltage AC/DC 12-240 V
! 1-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting, controlling by buttons
MR-41
MR-42
1
2
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50-60 Hz)
AC 0.17 - 3 VA / DC 0.1 - 1.2 W
AC 0.17 - 12 VA / DC 0.11 - 1.9 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
1x changeover / SPDT (AgSnO2)
Symbol
12
A1
14
11
ON/OFF A2
2x changeover / DPDT (AgSnO2)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x10 7
0.7x10 5
MR-42
MR-41
14
11
ON/OFF A2
22
24
21
Connection
MR-41
MR-42
L
N
L
N
+
A1
+
A1
ON
OFF
A2
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W
Yes
A1 - ON/OFF
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.2 oz. (62 g)
3.1 oz. (89 g)
EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1
12
A1
B1
ON
OFF
A2
B2
21 22 24
11 12 14
11 12 14
Function
MR-41
A1 - A2
ON/OFF
11 - 14
MR-42
A1 - A2
ON/OFF
11 - 14
B1
B2
B1
B2
21 - 24
11 - 14
21 - 24
43
Monitoring relays
V Voltage
1 phase
AC/DC
HRN-41
HRN-42
HRN-34
HRN-64
(Hysteresis) monitoring DC
and AC voltage 10-500 V,
divided into 3 inputs and
3 ranges, 2 independent
outputs 16 A, 2x time delay.
(Window) as HRN-41 but
function WINDOW. Other
functions (applicable for
HRN-41): faulty state memory,
hysteresis.
As HRN-33 but in voltage
range DC 6-30 V for
monitoring battery circuits
(6,12,24 V).
As HRN-63 but in voltage
range DC 6-30 V for
monitoring battery circuits
(6,12,24 V).
AC
HRN-33
HRN-35
HRN-37
HRN-63
HRN-67
Supply and monitored
voltage in range AC 48-276 V,
1x output for Umax and
Umin adjustable level.
As HRN-33 but individual
output for each level (Umax/
Umin). Adjustable time delay
to eliminate voltage peaks.
As HRN-33, but in voltage
range AC 24-150 V.
Supply and monitored
voltage in range AC 48-276 V,
1x output for Umax and
Umin adjustable level.
As HRN-63, but in voltage
range AC 24-150 V.
3 phase
cos-φ
HRN-56/120
HRN-56/208
HRN-56/240
Adjustable level Umin.
Adjustable level Umin.
Adjustable level Umin.
HRN-43
HRN-43N
Galvanically separated
supply, memory, adjustable
hysteresis and delay,
2 x independent output.
Galvanically separated
supply, memory, adjustable
hysteresis and delay,
2 x independent output.
Power factor
COS-1
Monitors and scores power
factor (phase shift between
current and voltage cos φ)
in 3phase / 1phase circuits
(motors, pumps etc.).
44
Monitoring relays
A Current
AC/DC
PRI-41
PRI-42
(Hysteresis) 3 inputs
(0.4-1.6, 1.25-5, 4-16A)
divided into 3 ranges
(selectable by a switch).
(Window) as PRI-41 but
function “WINDOW”.
AC
6M
PRI-32
PRI-51
PRI-53
Monitoring by current transformer (wire
through an opening, galv. separated,
without heat loss), adjust. current 1-20A,
multivoltage AC 24-240 and DC 24V,
output 8A changeover.
Monitoring of current by in-built
transformer, 5 ranges (in versions
1/2/5/8/16A), range 5A is suitable for
current transformer (X/5), supply and
output as PRI-32, difference from PRI-32:
direct monitoring and finer ranges
(higher sensitivity) = higher accuracy in
measuring.
For monitoring the current in threephase devices. Power supply: 24-240 V
AC/DC, galvanically separated from the
circuit of the monitored current 2 types
depending on the strength of rated
current In (1A, 5A).
Level
110X135
IP65
HRH-1
HRH-5
4 functions, advanced setting
for various combinations,
2 output contacts / 2PDT 16A.
Simple version, 2 functions,
galvanically separated supply
voltage UNI 24.. 240 V AC/DC
110X135
IP65
HRH-6
Device monitors 5 levels by
using six probes.
Supply voltage: 12-24 V DC.
114X114
IP65
HRH-6/S
HRH-7
Additional signalization to
HRH-6 with 6 control lights
on the front panel of device.
Suitable to operate in harsh
conditions due to the high
degree of protection IP65.
Switch monitors the level
changes in wells, reservoirs,
tanks, tankers etc.
Accessories
SHR
Level sensors
SHR-1(M, N) - for monitoring
flooding
SHR-2- for level detection
SHR-3 - for demanding and
industrial environment
45
Overview table
Relays monitor voltage
<U
Failure
Phase
sequence
Asymmetry
Delay
Hysteresis
Memory
Errors
from
monitored
1
AC 48 - 276 V
z
z
x
x
x
z
x
x
48
HRN-34
1-M
from
monitored
1
DC 6 - 30 V
z
z
x
x
x
z
x
x
48
HRN-35
1-M
from
monitored
1
AC 48 - 276 V
z
z
x
x
x
z
x
x
Description
Page
>U
1-M
Range
HRN-33
Type
Design
Phases
Setting
Voltage
Secure variables
48
For all types, the delay is adjustable from 0 - 10 seconds (to eliminate
short-term outages or peaks)
The lower voltage level (Umin) is set in % of the upper level (Umax)
HRN-37
1-M
from
monitored
1
AC 24 - 150 V
z
z
x
x
x
z
x
x
HRN-63
1-M
from
monitored
1
AC 48 - 276 V
z
z
x
x
x
z
x
x
48
HRN-64
1-M
from
monitored
1
DC 6 - 30 V
z
z
x
x
x
z
x
x
48
HRN-67
1-M
from
monitored
1
AC 24 - 150 V
z
z
x
x
x
z
x
x
48
HRN-43/120V
3-M
AC 120V
3
AC 3 x 84 - 480 V
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
3
AC 3 x 48 - 276 V
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
1
AC/DC
10 - 50 V
32 - 160 V
100 - 500 V
z
z
x
x
x
z
z
z
AC/DC
10 - 50 V
32 - 160 V
100 - 500 V
z
z
x
x
x
z
z
z
x
z
z
z
x
z
x
x
HRN-43N/120V
3-M
AC-120V
HRN-41/120V
HRN-41/24V
3-M
AC 120V
AC/DC 24V
HRN-42/120V
HRN-42/24V
3-M
HRN-56/120
HRN-56/208
HRN-56/240
1-M
AC 120V
AC/DC 24V
from
monitored
1
3
AC 3 x 72 - 160 V
AC 3 x 125 - 276 V
AC 3 x 144 - 276 V
2 output relays, functions of the second relay may be selected
(independent / parallel)
Galvanically separated power supply
48
50
50
52
Second relay function (independent / parallel)
Galvanically separated power supply from measuring inputs
52
Thanks to the power supply from all three phases, the relay is operational
even if one phase fails
53
Range
>I
<I
Delay
Hysteresis
Memory
Errors
>I
<I
Description
AC 24-240 V
DC 24 V
1
AC 1-20 A
z
x
x
x
x
z
x
Exceeding the current value - the current flowing through the monitored
conductor must not exceed 100 A even on a short-term basis
55
1
AC 0.05 - 0.5 A
AC 0.1 - 1 A
AC 0.2 - 2 A
AC 0.5 - 5 A
AC 0.8 - 8 A
AC 1.6 - 16 A
z
x
z
x
x
z
x
May be used for scanning the current from the current transformer - up to 600A
Power supply is galvanically separated from the measured current
56
3
AC 3 x 0.4 - 1.2 A
AC 3 x 2 - 6 A
z
z
z
x
x
z
z
Monitors the drop in the strength of current below the preset value
Monitors exceeding the preset value
57
Secure variables
Setting
Page
1-M
Phases
PRI-32
Supply voltage
Type
Design
Relay for current monitor
PRI-51/0.5
PRI-51/1
PRI-51/2
PRI-51/5
PRI-51/8
PRI-51/16
1-M
PRI-53/1
PRI-53/5
6-M
AC/DC
24-240 V
PRI-41/110V
PRI-41/24V
3-M
AC 120 V
AC/DC 24 V
1
AC/DC 0.12 - 1.6 A
AC/DC 0.375 - 5 A
AC/DC 1.2 - 16 A
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
The adjustable delay for elimination of short-term outages and peaks
for every level
Galvanically separated power supply
58
PRI-42/110V
PRI-42/24V
3-M
AC 120 V
AC/DC 24 V
1
AC/DC 0.12 - 1.6 A
AC/DC 0.375 - 5 A
AC/DC 1.2 - 16 A
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
The adjustable delay for elimination of short-term outages and peaks
for every level
Galvanically separated power supply
58
46
AC 24-240 V
DC 24 V
Relay for factor cos-φ monitoring
Secure variables
Phases
cos φ
range
> cos φ
< cos φ
Delay
Hysteresis
Memory
Errors
3-M
AC 110V
3
0.1 - 0.99
z
z
z
z
z
Page
Supply voltage
COS-1/120V
Description
Two output relays, one independent relay for each level
Galvanically separated power supply
54
Page
Type
Design
Setting
Secure variables
Leve
min.
Sensitivity
Probe
Function
Description
AC/DC
24-240 V
z
z
z
z
z
Measuring the frequency of 10 Hz will protect liquid from polarisation and
measuring probes from increased oxidation.Galv. separated power supply
59
Delay
Leve
max.
Setting
Supply voltage
Type
Design
Level switches
HRH-5
1-M
HRH-1/120V
HRH-1/24V
3-M
AC 110 V
AC/DC 24 V
z
z
z
z
z
Sensitivity adjustable by potentiometer
Galvanically separated power supply
60
HRH-6/DC
box
IP 65
AC/DC 12-24V
z
z*
z
z
z
* devices mainly designated for monitoring water level in
fire-engine tanks
62
HRH-7
box
IP65
AC/DC
24-240 V
z
z
z
z
z
suitable to work in harsh conditions due to the high degree of protection
IP65
64
47
Monitoring voltage relay range HRN-3x and HRN-6x
It serves to control supply voltage for appliances sensitive to supply tolerance, protection of the device against under/over voltage
HRN-3x is band voltage relay, HRN-6x is over/under voltage relay. For difference - see graph of function
HRN-33, HRN-63 - monitors voltage in range AC 48 - 276 V
- U max and U min can be monitored independently
HRN-34, HRN-64 - like HRN-33, but voltage range is DC 6 - 30 V
- monitoring of battery circuits (12, 24 V)
HRN-35 - like HRN-33, but independent output relays for each voltage level
- switching of other loads possible
HRN-37, HRN-67 - like HRN-33, monitors voltage in range AC 24 -150 V
- it is possible to monitor level of overvoltage and undervoltage independently
! Adjustable time delay for all types is 0 - 10 s (to eliminate short voltage drops or peaks)
! Voltage Umin adjusted as % of Umax
! 3-state indication - LEDs indicating normal state and 2 fault states
! Supply from monitored voltage (monitors level of its own supply)
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
!
EAN code
HRN-33: 8595188115636
HRN-34: 8595188115643
HRN-35: 8595188115650
HRN-37: 8595188130615
HRN-63: 8595188130622
HRN-64: 8595188130639
HRN-67: 8595188130646
R
Technical parameters
Supply and measuring
Terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Upper level (Umax):
Bottom level (Umin):
Max. permanent:
Peak overload < 1ms:
Time delay:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Dependance on temperature:
Tolerance of limit values:
Hysteresis (from fault to normal):
Output - Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
HRN-33 / HRN-63
HRN-34 / HRN-64
HRN-35
HRN-37 / HRN-67
A1 - A2
AC 48 - 276 V / 50-60Hz
AC max. 1.2 VA
AC 160 - 276 V
30 - 95 % Umax
AC 276 V
AC 290 V
A1 - A2
DC 6 - 30 V
DC max. 1.2 VA
DC 18 - 30 V
35 - 95 % Umax
DC 36 V
DC 50 V
A1 - A2
AC 48 - 276 V / 50-60Hz
AC max. 1.2 VA
AC 160 - 276 V
30 - 95 % Umax
AC 276 V
AC 290 V
A1 - A2
AC 24-150 V / 50-60Hz
AC max. 1.2 VA
AC 80-150 V
30 - 95 % Umax
AC 276 V
AC 290 V
adjustable 0 - 10 s
1x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
5%
<1%
< 0.1 % / °F (°C)
5%
2 - 6 % of adjusted value (only HRN-33, HRN-34, HRN-35, HRN-37)
1x changeove r / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 2x chang. for each level of voltage,(AgNi)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red / green LED
3x107
0.7x105
1x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.6 oz. (73 g)
3 oz. (85 g)
UL E308660; EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
2.2 oz. (61 g)
Symbol
2.2 oz. (61 g)
Connection
Un
Un
Un
-
+
HRN-33, HRN-37
HRN-63, HRN-67
A1
HRN-34, HRN-64
16
18
A1
HRN-33, HRN-37
HRN-63, HRN-67
HRN-35
16
18
A1
16
18
26
A1
A2
HRN-34,
HRN-64
A1
A2
HRN-35
A1
A2
28
25 26 28
15 16 18
A2
48
15
A2
15
A2
15
25
15 16 18
15 16 18
Monitoring voltage relay range HRN-3x and HRN-6x
Indication LED
HRN-34
HRN-33, HRN-37
Normal state
Umin<Un<Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
Normal state
Umin<Un<Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
Exceeded Umax (overvoltage)
Drop below Umin (undervoltage)
Un>Umax or Un<Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = ON
Normal state
Umin<Un<Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
HRN-64
HRN-63, HRN-67
Exceeded Umax (overvoltage)
Un>Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = ON
Exceeded Umax (overvoltage)
Un>Umax
Green LED = OFF
Red LED = ON
Exceeded Umax (overvoltage)
Drop below Umin (undervoltage)
Un>Umax or Un<Umax
Green LED = OFF
Red LED = ON
Drop below Umin (undervoltage)
Un<Umin
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
Drop below Umin (undervoltage)
Un<Umin
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
Exceeded Umax (overvoltage)
Un>Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = ON
Drop below Umin (undervoltage)
Un<Umin
Green LED = OFF
Red LED = ON
HRN-35
Description
HRN-33, HRN-37
HRN-63, HRN-67
Supply / monitoring voltage
A1
Supply / monitoring voltage
HRN-35
A1
A2
A2
Indication
Indication
Adjusting of upper value Umax
Adjusting of upper value Umax
Adjusting of delay
Adjusting of delay
Adjusting of bottom value Umin
Adjusting of bottom value Umin
25
26
28
Output contact for Umin
15
15
18
16
Output contact
16
18
Output contact for Umax
Function HRN-33, 34, 35, 37 (band voltage relay)
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
>
HRN-35
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
>
Monitoring relay series HRN-3x monitors level of voltage in single - phase circuits. Monitored voltage
serves also as supply voltage. It is possible to set two indipendent (all occurrences) levels of voltage,
Hysteresis
when exceeded the output is activated. HRN-33 and HRN-34 - in normal state the output relay is
Hysteresis
permanently switched. It switches off when there is a limit settings. This combination of linkage of
the output relay is advantageous when the full failure of supply (monitored) voltage is considered to
be a faulty state in the same way as a decrease of voltage within the set level. Output relay is in both
situations always switched off.
Differently HRN-35 version uses indipendent relay for each level, in normal state it is switched off. If
the upper level is exceeded (for example overvoltage) 1 relay switches on, when the bottom level (e.g.
Legend:
undervoltage) is exceeded 2 relay switches. It is thus possible to see the particular faulty state.
To eliminate short peaks in the main the time delay, which is possible to be set in range 0 - 10 s, is
Umax - upper adjustable level of voltage used. It functions when changing from normal to faulty state and prevents unavailing pulsation of
Un - measured voltage
the output relay caused by parasitive peaks. Time delay doesn´t apply when changing from faulty
Umin - bottom adjustable level of voltage
15-18 - switching contact of output relay No.1 to normal state, but hysteresis (1-6% depends on the voltage setting) apply. Thanks to changeover
25-28 - switching contact of output relay No. 2 contacts it is possible to get other configurations and functions according to actual requirements of
the application.
LED ≥ Un - green indicator light
HRN-34
HRN-33,HRN-37
LED U
- red indicator light
Function HRN-63, 64, 67 (over / under voltage relay)
HRN-63, 64, 67
Monitoring relay line HRN-6x serves to monitor levels of voltage in single-phase or DC circuits.
Monitored voltage is in the same time also supply voltage. It is possible to set two indipendent levels
of voltage. When Umax is exceeded, output is activated. In case voltage level falls below Umin, output
Umax - upper adjustable level of voltage
is deactivated. This combination is advantageous when full absence of supply voltage is understood
Un - measured voltage
as faulty state, as well as voltage drop within the set level. To eliminate short voltage peaks in the
Umin - bottom adjustable level of voltage
main there is time delay which can be set in a range of 0-10 sec. Such delay applies in case of going
15-18 - switching contact of output relay
from overvoltage to undervoltage. In case of returning from undervoltage to overvoltage this delay
LED U> - red indicator light
doesn’t apply. Thanks to changeover output contacts it is possible to reach various configurations and
functions according to requirements or an application.
Legend:
49
Relay for complete monitoring 3-phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N
! Monitoring 3-phase mains:
- voltage in 2 levels (undervoltage and overvoltage) in range 138-276 V or 280-480 V (3x400 V)
- phase asymmetry
- phase sequence
- phase failure
! Function “MEMORY” - for return from the faulty into normal state press button „RESET“ located on the front panel
! HRN-43 - for circuits 3x400 V (without neutral)
! HRN-43N - for circuits 3x400 / 120 V (with neutral)
! 2 output relays, selectable function of 2nd relay (independent / parallel)
! Fixed (t1) and adjustable (t2) delay to eliminate short voltage drops and peaks
! Galvanically
! Output contact: 2x changeover / SPDT
EAN code
HRN-43 /120V: 8595188130387
HRN-43N /120V: 8595188121323
Technical parameters
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Nominal voltage:
Terminals:
Upper level Umax:
Bottom level Umin:
Max. permanent overload:
Hysteresis:
Asymmetry:
Peak overload < 1ms:
Time delay t1:
Time delay t2:
Accuracy
Set. accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependance:
Limit values tolerance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
separated supply voltage AC 120 V
16 A / 250 V AC1
! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
HRN-43
HRN-43N
Description
Selection of function MEMORY
A1 - A2
AC 120 V (AC 50-60Hz)
max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
Function of 2nd relay
(1st-paralel, 2nd-independent)
Supply voltage
3x400 V / 50Hz
L1, L2, L3
240–480 V
3x400 V / 230 V / 50Hz
L1, L2, L3, N
138–276 V
35 - 99 % Umax
3x480 V
adjustable 5 % or 10 % of set value
5 - 20 %
600 < 1ms
350V < 1ms
fixed, max. 200 ms
adjustable 0-10 s
Hysteresis from
faulty to normal state
Indication overvoltage/
undervoltage, failure
Time pause t2
Umax adjusting
Sequence indication
Asymmetry indication
Asymmetry 5-20 % setting
Umin adjusting
Symbol
5%
<1%
< 0.1 % / °F (°C)
5%
2x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
3x107
0.7x105
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝ (90 x 52 x 65 mm)
8.4 oz. (239 g)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
HRN-43
HRN-43N
A1
L1
L2
L3
3~
16
18 26
A2
A1
L1
L2
L3
N
U
15
3~
A2
25
HRN-43N
HRN-43
L1
L2
L3
N
Un
Un
A1 A2 N
L1 L2 L3
A1 A2
16
18 26
28
U
Connection
16 15 18 28 25 26
50
28
L1 L2 L3
16 15 18 28 25 26
15
25
Relay for complete monitoring 3-phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N
Function
Overvoltage - undervoltage
Hysteresis
Legend:
L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage
RESET - press of the button on frontal panel
t1 - time delay, fixed
t2 - time delay, adjustable 0-10 sec
15-18 output relay 1
25-28 output relay 2
LED U - indication overvoltage / undervoltage
Hysteresis
Umax
Umin
L1
x
L2 Uma
Umin
x
L3 Uma
Umin
RESET
t1 t2
t1
t1
t2
Selection of 2nd the relay function:
In order to monitor 2 levels of voltage, it is possible to select if
output relay will respond to each level individually (see the
diagram) or both relays will switch in parallel way (see diagram
“phase sequence”).
Selection via DIP switch.
15-18
t1
t2
t1
25-28
LED
MEMORY - ON (DIP-2)
Phase sequence
Legend:
L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage
RESET - press of the button on frontal panel
t1 - time delay, fixed
t2 - time delay, adjustable 0-10 sec
15-18 output relay 1
25-28 output relay 2
LED indication of phase sequence
L1
L2
L3
L3
L2
L3
L2
L2
L3
L2
L3
RESET
t1
t1
Selection of 2nd relay function:
The function is not implied in the monitoring phase sequence, the
relays are switched in parallel way.
DIP switch no. 3 is ignored.
t1
15-18
(25-28)
t1
t1
LED
MEMORY - ON (DIP-2)
Asymmetry - phase failure
L1
L2
L3
Legend:
L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage
RESET - press of the button on frontal panel
t1 - time pause, fixed
t2 - time pause, adjustable 0-10 sec
- adjustable asymmetry 5-20%
15-18 output contact of relay 1
25-28 output contact of relay 2
LED - asymmetry indicator
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
RESET
Hysteresis
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
t2
15-18
(25-28)
t1
Selection of 2nd relay function:
The function is not implied in the monitoring phase sequence, the
relays are switched in parallel way.
DIP switch no. 3 is ignored.
LED
MEMORY - ON (DIP-2)
Function description
Relay is designated to monitor 3-phase circuits. Type HRN-43N controls voltage towards neutral wire, type HRN-43 controls interphase voltage. Relay can monitor voltage in two levels (overvoltage/
undervoltage), phase assymetry, sequence and failure. Each faulty state is indicated by individual LED. By DIP switch (No.3) it is possible to define function of the other relay – independent function (1x for
overvoltage, 1x for undervoltage) or in parallel. Time delays t1(fixed) – when changing from faulty to normal state or when de-energized and t2 (adjustable) when changing from normal to faulty state.
These delays prevent incorrect conduct and oscillation of output device during short voltage peaks in the main or during gradual voltage decline into normal.
Voltage control
Set upper level Umax in range 138-276 V (or 240 - 480 V for HRN-43) and lower level Umin in range 35-99% Umax. In case any phase passes this range, after a delay which eliminated short voltage peaks,
contact opens. Output contact again switches after returning back into monitored voltage range and exceeding fixed hysteresis (which is adjustable in two values by DIP switch).
Phase sequence
Monitors correctness of phase sequence. In case of unwanted change output contact breaks. In case of energization of a device with incorrect phase sequence, contact stays opened.
Asymmetry
Rate of assymetry between individual phases is set in a range of 5-20%. In case set asymmetry is exceeded, output relay breaks and LED indicating asymmetry shines. Delays t1, t2 and hysteretic are
applicable when returning to normal state.
51
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-41, HRN-42
! Monitoring DC / AC 1-phase in 3 ranges
! Monitoring voltage with 2 independent levels (overvoltage / undervoltage)
! Two versions,
HRN-41: Function “HYSTERESIS” a HRN-42: Function “WINDOW”
! “MEMORY” function - manual reset key on frontal panel
! Function of second relay (independent / parallel)
! Adjustable delay for short peaks
! Galvanically separated supply voltage from measuring inputs
! Output contact: 2x changeover / SDPT 16 A / 250 V AC1 for all monitored levels
EAN code
HRN-41 /120V: 8595188140430
HRN-41 /24V: 8595188140416
! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
HRN-42 /120V: 8595188140478
HRN-42 /24V: 8595188140454
Technical parameters
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring
Ranges:
Terminals:
Input resistance:
Max. permanent overload:
Peak overload < 1ms:
Time delay for Umax:
Time delay for Umin:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Dependance on temperature:
Tolerance of limit values:
Hysteresis (from fault to normal):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
HRN-41
HRN-42
A1 - A2
AC 120 V or AC/DC 24 V (AC 50-60Hz)
max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
Description
Measured voltage AC or DC
MEMORY function
Function of 2nd relay
(1st-paralel, 2nd-independent)
Hysteresis from faulty to OK normal state
Supply indication
Adjusting upper level
- Umax
Indication Umax
t1 - time delay for Umax
10 - 50 V (AC 50Hz) 32 - 160 V (AC 50Hz) 100 - 500 V (AC 50Hz) Output indication
C - B3
C - B2
C - B1
Indication Umin
1.1 MΩ
360 kΩ
110 kΩ
600 V
300 V
100 V
1 kV
700 V
250 V
Symbol
adjustable, 0 -10 s
adjustable, 0 -10 s
t2 - time delay for Umin
Adjusting bottom level - Umin
Connection
Uin100-500
32-160
5%
<1%
< 0.1 % / °C
5%
selectable 5 % / 10 %
2x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
yellow LED
3x107
0.7x105
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝ (90 x 52 x 65 mm)
8.4 oz. (239 g)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Un
10-50
A1
C
B1
B2
B3
16
18 26
28
A1 A2 C
~
~
A2
15
B1 B2 B3
25
16 15 18 28 25 26
Function
Un
Umax
Uin
Umin
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
15-18
25-28
15-18
25-28
RESET
LED > U
LED < U
LED
MEMORY-ON (DIP2)
Relay is delivered in two versions – according to the way of setting and monitoring voltage levels.
HRN-41 has function Hysteresiss, which means that only upper level is set (Umax) and lower level (Umin) is
set in % from upper level. Therefore lower level automatically changes when changing upper level.
HRN-42 has function “WINDOW”, which means that upper level (Umax) and lower level (Umin) are set independently in % from rated monitores range.
Both types have choice of function MEMORY, in case the relay gets into a faulty state it keeps output in this state until it is reset by button RESET. DIP switch No.3 can be used to choose if relays should switch
individually for each level or in parallel in case any level of voltage is overrun. DIP switch No.4 serves to set hysteresis which applies when going from normal state to a faulty one.
Relay has protection against polarity reversing for DC voltage or incorrectly chosen AC-DC voltage (this fault is indicated by flashing of both LEDs (LED < U a LED > U).
52
Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-56
! Relay
monitors phase sequence and failure (e.g. control of correct motor winding etc.)
! Relay is designated for monitoring of 3-phase networks
! Supply from all phases which means that relay is functional also in case of one phase failure
! Supply and monitored supply Un:
1-MODULE
HRN-56/120 - 3x120V
HRN-56/208 - 3x208 V
HRN-56/240 - 3x240 V
! Fixed time delay T1 (500ms) and adjustable time delay T2 (0 -10s)
! Faulty state is indicated by LED and by opening of output relay contact
EAN code
HRN-56 /120V: 8595188130745
HRN-56 /208V: 8595188130134
HRN-56 /240V: 8595188137119
! Output contact 1x changeover / SPDT
R
Technical parameters
120
Monitoring terminals:
Supply terminals:
Supply/measured voltage:
Level Umin:
Level Uoff :
Burden:
Hysteresis:
Max. permanent overload:
Peak overload < 1s:
Time delay T1:
Time delay T2:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Indication of state:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
3 x 120V / 50-60 Hz
AC 3 x 160V
AC 3 x 180V
! 1-MODULE, 3-MODULE,
HRN-56
208
8 A / 250V AC1
DIN rail mounting
Description
Supply terminal
240
L1, L2, L3
L1, L2, L3
3 x 208V / 50-60 Hz
3 x 240V / 50-60 Hz
adjustable 70 - 95 % Un
60 % Un
max. 2 VA
2%
AC 3 x 276V
AC 3 x 300V
max. 500 ms
adjustable 0 -10 s
L1
L2
L3
Indication
Adjusting value Umin
Adjusting of time
delay
16
15
18
Output contacts
1x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
10 A
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
red LED
1x107
1x105
Symbol
L1
3~
L3
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4,with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.3 oz. (66 g)
UL E308660; EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
16
18
U
L2
15
Connection
L1
L2
L3
16
15
18
Function
Hysteresis
Umin
UOFF
L1
UOFF
L2
UOFF
L3
t1
t2
Relay in 3-phase main monitors correct phase sequence and phase failure. Green LED illuminates permanently and
indicates energization. In case of phase failure red LED flashes and relay turns off. When changing to faulty state, time
delay applies – delay setting is done by potentiometer on the front panel of the device. In case of incorrect phase
sequence, red LED shines permanently and relay is open. In case supply voltage falls below 60% Un (Uoff lower level)
relay immediately opens with no delay and faulty state is indicate by red LED.
HRN-56: Thanks to supply from all phases, relay is functional also in case of one phase failure.
15-18
green LED
red LED
53
Power factor monitoring relay COS-1
! Relay
monitors phase shift between current and voltage - cos-φ in 3-phase and also 1-phase main for monitoring
overload / unloading of motors
! Supply set 3x400 V
! Function “MEMORY” - manual reset - button on front panel
! It is possible to connect current transformer in front of the device. This enables increase of current range
! 2 output relays, independent for each level
! Adjustable delay to eliminate short peak overloading
! Adjustable range and bottom level cos-φ, of power factor between
0.1- 0.99
! Adjustable delay to eliminate starting of motor
! Selectable hysteresis 5 or 10%
! Galvanically separated supply voltage AC 120 V
! Output contact: 2x changeover / SPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1
EAN code
COS-1/120V: 8595188147163
Symbol
Description
A1
A1 - A2
AC 120V (AC 50-60Hz)
max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
16
φ
2x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
20 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
yellow LED
3x107
0.7x105
15
2nd relay function
(1 -parallel, 2nd- independent)
st
25
Supply voltage
Hysteresis from faulty to normal state
Time delay t1 for motor starting
Upper level - max exceeding
Output indication
Upper level - MAX
Bottom level- min exceeding
Time delay t2 for peak elimination
Adjusting bottom level - Cos φ MIN
Connection
P
Un
Un
Un
S
A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3
inner
shunt
16 15 18 28 25 26
A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3
1-phase connection
5%
<1%
< 0.1 % / °F (°C)
5%
28
Sellection of function MEMORY
B1
L1
L2
L3
A2
3x400 V / 50 Hz
L1, L2, L3, B1
adjustable 0.1 - 0.99
adjustable 0.1 - 0.99
(input L1, L2, L3) AC 3x460 V
0.1 - 16 A
20 A (< 3 sec.)
adjustable 5% or 10%
adjustable 0.5 - 30 s
adjustable 0 - 10 s
18 26
3-phase connection
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring
Voltage set:
Terminals:
Upper level cos-φ:
Bottom level cos-φ:
Max. permanent voltage:
Current range:
Current overloading:
Hysteresis:
Time delay t1:
Time delay t2:
Accuracy
Accuracy setting (mechanical):
Accuracy of repetition:
Temperature dependance:
Limit values tolerance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
COS-1
Connection with current
transformer
Technical parameters
! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
inner
shunt
16 15 18 28 25 26
A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3
inner
shunt
16 15 18 28 25 26
Function
L1-L2-L3
MAX
Hysteresis
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
max.1x 2.5, max.2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝ (90 x 52 x 65 mm)
8 oz. (240 g)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
COS φ
Hysteresis
MIN
RESET
t1
t2
t2
t1
t1
15-18
t2
t1
25-28
LED
φ
LED
φ
LED
MEMORY ON (DIP-2)
After the device is switched on, the yellow LED flashes for time t1 and both relays are switched (state OK). This delay serves to eliminate a faulty state e.g. motor start-up. If the upper limit is exceeded
(cosφ - max) red LED shines > cosφ . After a time delay t2 the output relay opens (15-18). Equally, if it falls under bottom limit (cosφ - min) red LED shines < cosφ and after a time delay t2 the output relay
opens (25-28). In case the load is disconnected (no current), red LED shines > cosφ (cosφ = 1).
54
Current monitoring relay PRI-32
! Current transformer is a part of the product. Inside this transformer there is a wire which senses the volume of flowing current
! This construction reduces thermal stress of product
when compared with conventional solutions with inbuilt shunt, and
increases current range up to 20 Amps, and galvanically separates monitored circuit
! For heating bars in sliding rails, heating cables, indication of current flow, controlling of 1-phase motor consumption...
! Universal supply AC 24 - 240 V and DC 24 V
! Supply is galvanically separated from measuring current
! Current exceeding – current flowing through monitored wire must not exceed
100 A
! Output contact: 1x changeover / SPDT 8 A
! Clamp terminals
! 1-phase, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
PRI-32: 8595188121965
R
Technical parameters
Description
PRI-32
Supply circuit
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Current range:
Current adjustment:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependancy:
Limit values tolerance:
Overload capacity:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Output indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Supply terminals
A1 - A2
AC 24 - 240 V, DC 24 V (AC 50-60 Hz)
max. 1.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
A1
A2
Output indication
Supply indication
1 - 20 A (AC 50 Hz)
potentiometer
Controlling cable outlet
(max. diameter 6 mm)
5%
<1%
< 0.1 % / °C
5%
max.100 A / 10 s
Adjustment of access
current
16
1x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
red LED
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4,
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.4 oz. (68 g)
UL E308660; EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
15
18
Output contact
Symbol
Connection
Un
A1
16
18
A1
A2
A2
15
16
15
18
Function
Imax
I
Hysteresis
Monitoring relay PRI-32 serves to monitor current level in single phase AC circuits. Due to its fluent adjustment of release current, it
is predestined for applications with necessity of current flow indication, and can be used as precedence relay. Output relay is off in
normal state. In case the set current level is exceeded, it switches. Multivoltage supply is an advantage.
15-18
LED
Un
55
Current monitoring relay PRI-51
! It
serves for monitoring of heating in rail-switches, heating cables, consumption of one-phase motors, indicates
current flow
! Flexible adjustment by potentiometer, choice of 6 ranges:
AC 0.05-0.5A; AC 0.1-1A; AC 0.2-2A; AC 0.5-5A; AC 0.8-8A; AC 1.6-16A
! Adjustable delay 0.5 - 10 s to eliminate short current peaks
! It is possible to use for current scanning from current transformer - up to 600 A!
! Universal supply AC 24 - 240 V and DC 24 V
EAN code
PRI-51 /0.5A:
PRI-51 /1A:
PRI-51 /2A:
PRI-51 /5A:
PRI-51 /8A:
PRI-51 /16A:
! Supply is galvanically separated from measured current, it must be in the same phase
8595188142885
8595188124904
8595188124911
8595188124928
8595188124935
8595188124942
! Output contact: 1x changeover / SPDT 8 A
! 1-phase, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
R
Technical parameters
Supply circuit
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Load:
Current range:
Max. permanent current:
Inrush overload <1ms:
Current adjustment:
Time delay:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependancy:
Limit values tolerance:
Hysteresis (fault to OK):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Output indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Description
PRI-51
Supply terminals
A1 - A2
AC 24 - 240 V a DC 24 V (AC 50-60 Hz)
max. 1.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
A1
Measuring input (only AC)
A2
B1
B2
Output Indication
Adjusting current in % In
Adjusting time pause
between B1 - B2
PRI-51/0.5 PRI-51/1 PRI-51/2 PRI-51/5 PRI-51/8 PRI-51/16
AC0.05-0.5A AC0.1-1A AC0.2-2A AC0.5-5A AC0.8-8A AC1.6-16A
(AC50Hz) (AC 50Hz) (AC 50Hz) (AC 50Hz) (AC 50Hz) (AC 50Hz)
0.5A
applicable also for current transformer
1A
2A
5A
8A
100 A
potentiometer
adjustable 0.5-10 s
5%
<1%
< 0.1 % / °C
5 % (10% for 0.05-0.5A range)
5%
1x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
green / red LED
16 A
16
15
18
Output contact
Symbol
Connection
Example Connection: PRI-51 with current
transformer for current range increase
A1
A2
16
18
L
N
Un
Ip
Load
Un
Is
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
Current
transformer
A1 A2
A1 A2
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
B1
B2
15
B1 B2
B1 B2
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
16
16
III.
2
15
18
15
18
solid wire max.2x2.5 or 1x4,with sleeve max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
Example of an order
2.54 oz. (72 g)
UL E308660; EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Always specify all reference name of current relay according to required range, for example PRI-51/5.
Function
Hysteresis
56
Monitoring relay PRI-51 serves to monitor current level in one-phase AC circuits. Gradual setting of actuating current
of monitoring relay enables many different applications. Output relay is in normal state opened. After the set current
level is reached, relay closes after the set delay (0.5-10s). When returning from faulty to normal state there is a hystersis
(5%). Multi-voltage of this relay is an advantage. It is possible to monitor load which doesn´t have the same supply as
monitoring relay PRI-51.Range of PRI-51 can be increased by an external current transformer.
Three-phase current monitoring relay PRI-53
! It is intended for monitoring the current in three-phase devices (e.g. cranes, motors, etc.)
! 24-240 V AC/DC power supply galvanically separated from the circuit of the monitored current
6
! Adjustable current level in % of In
! Fixed difference level
! Adjustable delay level (when exceeding the preset limit)
! Adjustable function:
- UNDER - monitors the drop in the strength of current below the preset value I
- OVER - exceeding the preset value I
! 2 types depending on the strength of rated current In (1A, 5A)
! 6-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
! Output relay with 2 changeover contacts
! Option of connecting via the current transformers to increase the value of the monitored current by up to 600 A
Connection
EAN code
PRI-53/1: 8595188142137
PRI-53/5: 8595188142144
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Current monitoring terminals
1st phase:
2nd phase:
3rd phase:
Supply voltage:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Operating AC frequency:
Burden: (max):
Rated current In:
Current level - I:
Overload capacity
- continuous:
- max.3s:
Difference:
Delay (until failure):
Output relay - contact:
AC contact capacity:
DC contact capacity:
Mechanical life:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh
(power supply – relay contact):
Overvoltage category:
Pollution level:
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
N
L1
L2
L3
PRI-53/1
PRI-53/5
Un
A1, A2
I1, I2
I3, I4
I5, I6
24 - 240V AC/DC (AC 50-60 Hz)
± 10%
45 - 65 Hz
3VA / 1.2W
AC 1A
AC 5A
adjustable 40 - 120% In
2A
20A
LOAD
I1 I2
A1 A2
I3 I4
I5 I6
16 15 18 28 25 26
Example of connection: PRI - 53 with a current conversion
transformer for increasing the current range.
10A
50A
Device describtion
fix 1 % In
adjustable 0.5 - 10s
2x schangeover / SPDT (AgNi) gilded
250V / 8 A, max. 2000VA
30V / 8A
3x106 at rated load
Current monitoring terminals
Supply voltage terminals
Supply voltage indication
A1
I1
A2
I2
I3
I4
PRI-53/1
Indication of exceeding
the preset limit
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
Delay setting
Current level setting
4 kV / 1 min.
III.
2
IP 40 from font panel / IP 20 terminal
max 2 x 1.5 / 1 x 2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 4.1˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 105 x 64 mm)
7.3 oz. (208 g)
7.3 oz. (208 g)
EN 60255-6, EN 60255-27, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4
UNDER / OVER
function setting
16
15
18
Output contacts
28
25
26
I5
I6
Current
monitoring
terminals
Functions
After the supply voltage is connected the green LED is on.
UNDER function:
If the strength of the monitored current in all phases exceeds the preset level I, the relay is triggered and the red LED
is off. If the strength of the monitored current drops in any phase below the level I, the relay is disconnected after
the preset delay timing elapses and the red LED goes on. The red LED flashes during the delay.
If the strength of the monitored current returns above the level I + difference, the relay is triggered without delay
and the red LED goes off.
OVER function:
If the strength of the monitored current is lower in all phases than the preset level I, the relay is disconnected and
the red LED is off.
If the strength of the monitored current exceeds in any phase the level I, the relay is triggered after the preset delay
timing elapses and the red LED goes on. The red LED flashes during the delay.
If the strength of the monitored current again drops below the level I - difference, the relay is disconnected without
delay and the red LED goes off.
57
Current monitoring relay PRI-41, PRI-42
!
To monitor overloading / discharge (machine, motor...), load sensing, diagnostics of remote device (interruption, short
circuit, current cunsumption increase...)
!
Monitors AC/DC 1-phase current in 3 ranges
!
Monitoring adjusted current in 2 independent levels
!
PRI-41: “HYSTERESIS” function and PRI-42: “WINDOW” function
!
Function of 2nd relay (independent / parallel):
“MEMORY” function - manual reset
“RESET” button on the frontal panel
EAN code
PRI-41/120V:
PRI-41/24V:
PRI-42/120V:
PRI-42/24V:
8595188140508
8595188140492
8595188140539
8595188140522
Technical parameters
Supply circuit
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Ranges:
Terminals:
Input resistance:
Max. permanent current:
Inrush overload <1ms:
Time delay for Imax:
Time delay for Imin:
Accuracy
Measuring accuracy:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependancy:
Limit values tolerance:
Hysteresis (fault to OK):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
PRI-41
!
Adjustable time delay for each level
!
Galvanically separated supply
!
Output contact: 2x changeover / SPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1 for each current level
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
PRI-42
Description
Meassured AC or DC
A1 - A2
AC 120 V or AC / DC 24 V (AC 50-60 Hz)
max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
4 - 16 A (AC50Hz) 1.25 - 5 A (AC50Hz) 0.4 - 1.6 A (AC50Hz)
C - B3
C - B2
C - B1
50 mΩ
11 mΩ
5 mΩ
1.6 A
5A
16 A
2A
6.3 A
20 A
adjustable 0-10 sec
adjustable 0-10 sec
5%
<1%
< 0.1 % / °F (°C)
5%
selectable 5 % / 10 %
MEMORY function
Function of 2nd relay
(1st-paralel, 2nd-independent)
Supply indication
Hysteresis from faulty to OK normal
state
Indication Imax
t1 - time delay for Imax
Adjusting upper level - Imax
Output indication
Indication Imin
t2 - time delay for Imin
Adjusting bottom level - Imin
Symbol
Connection
I 0.4-1.6
1.25-5
Un
4-16
A1
2x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
yellow LED
3x107
0.7x105
16
18 26
28
A1 A2 C
B1 B2 B3
C
B1
B2
B3
A2
15
25
16 15 18 28 25 26
Function
Un
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝ (90 x 52 x 65 mm)
8.4 oz. (239 g)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Imax
I
Imin
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
15-18
25-28
15-18
25-28
RESET
LED > I
LED < I
LED
MEMORY-ON (DIP2)
Relay is delivered in two versions - according to setting and level monitoring.
PRI-41 has function hysteresis, which means that you set only upper level (Imax) and lower level is set in % from upper level. Therefore when upper level is changed, lower level changes automatically.
PRI-42 has function “WINDOW”, which means that you set upper level (Imax) and lower level (Imin) individually in % of rated monitored range.
Both types have selectable function MEMORY. In case the relay gets to faulty state, this function leaves relay in this state until it is reseted by RESET button. DIP switch No. 3 can be used to choose if output
relay should switch for each level separatelly, or in parallel in case any current level is exceeded. DIP switch No. 4 serves to set hysteresis which applies when changing from faulty to normal state. Relay is
protected against re-poling of DC current, or wrong AC/DC current (this fault is indicated by LED < I a LED > I common flashing).
58
Level switch HRH-5
! Relay is designed for monitoring levels in wells, basins, reservoirs, tanks...
! In one device you can choose the following configurations:
- one-level switch of conductive liquids (by connecting H and D)
- two-level switch of conductive liquids
! One-state device monitors one level, two-state device monitors two levels (switches on one level and switches off on
another level)
! Choice of function PUMP UP, PUMP DOWN
! Adjustable time delay on the output (0.5 - 10s)
! Sensitivity adjustable by a potentiometer (5-100kΩ)
! Measuring frequency 10Hz prevents polarization of liquid and raising oxidation of measuring probes
! Galvanically separated supply voltage UNI 24.. 240 VAC/DC
! Output contact 1x changeover / SPDT
EAN code
HRH-5: 8595188136396
! 1-MODULE, mounting onto a
Technical parameters
HRH-5
Functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Input:
Toleration of voltage range:
Measuring circuit
Sensitivity ( input resistance):
Voltage n electrodes:
Current in probes:
Time response:
Max. capacity of probe cable:
Time delay (t):
Time delay after switching on (t1):
Accuracy
Accuracy in setting (mechanical):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Switching voltage:
Switched voltage:
Min. switched output DC:
Mechanical life (AC1):
Electrical life:
Other information
Operational temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strenght:
Operational position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvltage category:
Pollution degree:
Profile of connecting wires (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Recommended measuring probes:
2
A1 - A2
24... 240 V AC/ DC (AC 50-60 Hz)
max. 2 VA
-15 %; +10 %
adjustable in range 5 kΩ -100 kΩ
max. AC 3.5 V
AC < 0.1 mA
max. 400 ms
800 nF (sensitivity 5kΩ), 100 nF (sensitivity 100 kΩ)
adjustable, 0.5 -10 sec
1.5 sec
±5%
1x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy )
8 A / AC1
2500 VA, 240 W
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
1x107
1x105
8A/250V AC1
DIN rail
Device description
Supply voltage terminals
Terminals for conection of
probes H, D
Indication of supply voltage
Choice of function
Output indication
Sensitivity setting of probe
Choice of function
Adjustment of
delay on output
Terminal for connection of
probe C
Output contacts
Connection
Monitoring of two levels
Monioring of one level
Un
A1
A2
A1
A2
H
D
H
D
16
C
15
18
max
max
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C )
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
3.75 kV (supply - sensors)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from font panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
AWG 10 (2.5 mm2)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.5 oz. (72 g)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
see pg. 66
Symbol
A1
16
18
C
D
H
A2
15
Un
min
Tank with
monitored level
16
C
15
18
Tank with
monitored level
Function
Function PUMP UP
Function PUMP DOWN
Un
max
level
min
15-18
red LED
Un
max
level
min
t
t
15-18
t
t
red LED
Relay is designated for monitoring of levels of conductive liquids with possibility of functions: PUMP UP or
PUMP DOWN. To prevent polarization and liquid electrolysis of liquid, and undesirable oxidation of measuring
probes, alternating current is used. For measuring use three measuring probes: H- upper level, D- lower level,
C - common probe. In case you use a tank made of a conductive material, you can use it as probe C. In case you
require monitoring of one level only, it is neccessary to connect inputs H and D and connect them to one probe
- in this case sensitivity is lowered by half (2.5... 50kΩ). Probe C can be connected with a protective wire of
supply system (PE). To prevent undesirable switching out output contacts by various influences (sediment on
probes, humidity...) it is possible to set sensitivity of the device according to conductivity of monitored liguid
(corresponding to “resistance” of liquid) range 5 up to 100kΩ. To reduce infuences of undesirable switching of
output contacts by liquid gorgle in tanks, it is possible to set delay of output reaction 0.5 - 10s.
59
Level switch HRH-1
Used to control the level in wells, reservoirs, tanks, pools, tankers, containers, etc.
Within the framework of a single device, the following configurations can be selected (see functions graph):
- two separate level switches
- two probes in one tank
- filling tank from well
! Single-state monitors one level (full or empty tank), double-state monitors two levels (switches on upon one level
and switches off upon the second)
! DIP switch on front panel is used to choose function (see functions graph):
- pumping in
- pumping out
- over-pumping
! Option of setting time delay for reacting to the output upon a change in level, any type of delay by DIP switch
! Sensitivity adjustable by potentiometer (probe resistance based on fluid)
! The measuring frequency 500 Hz prevents fluid polarization and oxidation increase of measured probes
! Galvanically separated supply AC 120 V or AC/DC 24 V
! Output contact 2x switches 16 A / 250 V AC1
! 3-MODULE design, mounting onto DIN rail
!
!
EAN code
HRH-1/120V: 8595188117180
HRH-1/24V: 8594030338209
Technical parameters
HRH-1
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Hysteresis (input - opening):
Voltage on electrode:
Current in probes:
Time reaction:
Max. cable capacity:
Time delay tD:
Time delay tH:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech.):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Measuring sensors:
3
A1 - A2
AC 120 V or AC/DC 24V
galvanicaly separated (AC 50-60Hz)
max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
in an adjustable range 5 kΩ- 100 kΩ
max. AC 5 V
AC < 1 mA
max. 400 ms
4 nF
adjustable 0.5 -10 sec
adjustable 0.5 -10 sec
±5%
2x changeover / SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
3x107
0.7x105
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 / with cavern max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝ (90 x 52 x 65 mm)
8 oz. (240 g)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
see pg. 66
Symbol
Connection
Un
16
A1
18
28
26
C
D
H
S
A1 A2 C
15
A2
D H S
25
16 15 18 28 25 26
Description
Terminal for connection of conductor
common for both probes
Supply voltage terminals
Terminals for connecting probe
Terminals for connecting shield
A1
A2
C
S
H
D
DIP
Supply voltage indication
Delay setting
relay H
H relay indication
(OUT2)
Delay setting
relay D
D relay indication
(OUT1)
16
Output contact of D relay - OUT1
15
18
28
25
26
Sensitivity setting
of probe according to
resistance of
measured fluid
Output contact of
H relay - OUT2
Description and importance of DIP switches
Measuring probes
There can be any measuring probe (any conductive contact, it is recommended to use
brass or stainless steel).
The probe wire does not need to be shielded, but it is recommended. When using a
shielded wire, the shielding is connected to terminal S.
60
single / double relay
Function 2x
1x
Input inverse OFF
ON
Delay type D ta
tb
relay D - delayed close
Delay type H ta
tb
relay H - delayed close
change of function of relay D
Level switch HRH-1
Functions
Two separate level switches
Un
Un
sonda D
probe D
LED D
LED D
OUT1- relay D
OUT1- relay D
tD
tD
probe H
probe H
LED H
LED H
OUT2 - relay H
tH
OUT2 - relay H
tH
When the tank is empty relay D open, relay H is closed
tD
tD
tH
tH
When the tank is empty both relays are switched
Two probes in single tank
Un
Un
probe D
probe D
probe H
probe H
LED D
LED D
OUT1- relay D
OUT1- relay D
tD
tD
LED H
LED H
OUT2 - relay H
OUT2 - relay H
tH
tH
tD
tD
tH
tH
The relay, which is used to control the level liquids conductive (water, chemical solutions, food, etc.).
In this principle, it goes on about the measurement of liquids by measuring probes. As the measuring used signal is 5V AC/ 500Hz. Using an AC signal prevents the the increasing oxidation of probes and
unwanted polarization and electrolysis liquid. During depending on the DIP settings configurations, switches can control two independent levels or use a combined function for one level (see diagram of
functions).
The relay is equipped with regulation of the sensitivity to to liquid resistance. It‘s also possible to eliminate some of the unwanted switching in the sensitivity settings according to specific conditions
(for example, pollution probe sediments, humidity, etc.). It‘s also possible for each probe to set the delay in the range of 0.5-10s, and using the DIP switch type delay (when you turn the relay on and off,
depending on application).
Example of usage
For controlling two independent tanks
For controlling the level combination of upper and bottom probe
container with
the monitored level
H S
container with
the monitored level
container with
the monitored level
16 15 18 28 25 26
16 15 18 28 25 26
Pump control or other output device
D
probe H
A1 A2 C
probe D
H S
common
probe C
D
probe H
A1 A2 C
Un
common
probe C
common
probe C
probe D
Un
Pump control or other output device
Output relays for pump control or other output devices,
Selecting contacts is depending on the selected function
Note:
As a common probe, it could be used with an advantage such as metal pipes, tanks, etc.
Due to the isolation of probes from a supply voltage, and the measured voltage which is up to 5V, it is possible to connect probes using standard communication cables.
61
Level switch HRH-6
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
EAN code
HRH-6 /DC:
HRH-6S:
!
8595188137409
8595188137416
!
Technical parameters
Function 1 monitors minimal and maximal level depth, for example in fire engine cars, tanks etc.
Function 2 monitors level depth in water collectors, basins, pools etc.
Selection of particular function is made by jumper on the front panel
Level depth is indicated on the panel of device by LED
Device monitors 5 levels by using six probes (one probe is common)
Common probe can be replaced by a metal (conductive) tank
Level indicationby six LED‘s on the front panel of the device
It is possible to connect another indication module (e.g. in fire-engine cabin)
Adjustable sensitivity according to liquid conductvity
Adjustable time delay - elimination of level movement, e.g. while a tank is being filled up
Measuring frequency 10 Hz to prevent polarization of liquid
Supply voltage 12... 24 V DC (to be used in fire-engines)
Contact relay 10A for signalization of full / empty tank (according to a chosen function)
Choice of functions PUMP UP/OFF/PUMP DOWN by a switch located on the front panel of the device
Protection degree IP65
HRH-6/DC
Function:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Sensitivity adjustable in the range*:
Voltage on probes:
Probe cable maximum capacity:
Time delay:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Switching voltage:
Peak current:
Switching voltage:
Min. switching capacity DC:
Mechanical life (AC1):
Electrical life:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Operating position:
Protection degree:
Pollution degree:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Recommended measuring probe:
2
12.. 24V DC
max. 1.8 W
+/- 20%
min. 10... 20kΩ
max. 100... 150kΩ
max. 3V AC
500nF (for min. sensitivity), 50nF (for maximum sensitivity)
adjustable 1... 10s
6 x LED (1x red, 1x yellow, 4x green)
1x NO-SPST (AgNi / Silver Alloy )
10A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 200 W / DC
16 A / < 3s
250V AC1 / 24V DC
500 mW
3x107
0.7x105
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
any
IP 65
2
4.3˝ x 5.3˝ x 2.8˝ (110 x 135 x 72 mm)
13.6 oz. (384 g)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
see pg. 66
* Note: sensitivity is higher at both ends of a range of values.
Description of function
Connection of HRH-6 in a block
SENS.
J1 - jumper
- function selection
+
-
Sensitivity setup
+
Delay setup
HRH-6/DC
Basic unit
Function switch
LED6
- level L5 indication
Cable for connecting probes
LED5
- level L4 indication
LED4
- level L3 indication
LED3
- level L2 indication
LED2
- level L1 indication
LED1 - supply
voltage indication
Cable for connecting
auxiliary signalling
Supply cable / relay
contact
HRH-6/DC
HRH-6/S
Auxiliary signalling
LED6
- level L5 indication
Connection
HRH-6/DC
Connection of basic unit
+Un
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
C
18
HRH-6/S
15
- Un
62
DELAY
LED5
- level L4 indication
LED4
- level L3 indication
LED3
- level L2 indication
LED2
- level L1 indication
LED1 - supply
voltage indication
Level switch HRH-6
HRH-6 block connecting
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
C
PU SW PD
PD
SW
PU
15
18
12-24V DC
+
HRH-6/AC
C
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
LED4
LED5
LED6
+ 6V
LED1
LED2
LED3
- Un
+ Un
15
18
HRH-6/S
LED4
LED5
LED6
+ 6V
LED1
LED2
LED3
Functions
Un
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
LED6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
FUNCTION
J1
15-18
15-18
FUNCTION
15-18
J1
15-18
This device monitors level of a conuctive liquid in a tank by using six single probes or one 6-fold probe. In case you use a tank made of a conductive material, it is possible to use it as a common probe C.
This common probe is connected to a pole of supply (for fire-engines it means its body) in case of supply voltage 12... 24VDC.
The device is controlled by a three-position switch PUMP UP/OFF/ PUMP DOWN. After switching into a position PUMP UP or PUMP DOWN, red LED1 shines and then also LED2... LED6 according to liquid
level. Output relay has 2 selectable functions.
Funtion setting is done by a jumper on basic board of HRH-6.
Function 1: (for use in fire-engines) - jumper is applied. In case of function PUMP UP and level reaching L5, the relay controlling e.g. acustic signalization, permanently closes and indicated full tank. In case
of PUMP DOWN function and level dropunder level L3, relay priodically switches and under L2 it switches permanently (indicates almost empty tank).
Function 2: (for keeping liquid level) - jumper is not applied. In case of PUMP UP, sensor is switched until liquid reaches level L5. Then relay opens and switches again in case the lliguid level falls under level
L1. In case of PUMP DOWN - relay is switched until liquid falls under level L1. Then relay opens and switches again on level L5.
To eliminate LED flashing while level gurgle it is possible to delay reaction of probes (set delay 1... 10s). According to conductivity of liquid it is possible to set sensitivity of probes (corresponding to
“resistance” of liquid).
63
Level switch HRH-7
NEW!
114x114
! Suitable to operate / work in harsh conditions due to the high degree of protection IP65
! Swich monitors the level changes in wells, reservoirs, tanks, tankers etc.
! It is possible to select the following configurations:
- one-level switch of conductive liquids monitors one level (by connecting H and D)
- two-level switch of conductive liquids monitors two levels (switches on at one level and switched off at another level)
! Choice of function PUMP-UP or PUMP-DOWN
! Adjustable time delay of output (0.5–10 s)
! Adjustable sensitivity using potentiometer (5–100 kΩ)
! Measuring frequency 10 Hz prevents liquid polarization and increased oxidation of measuring probes
! Measuring circuits are galvanically separated from the power source of the product and circuits of the relay contact by
enhanced insulation according to EN 60664-1 for overvoltage category III.
! Output contact: 1x changeover 16 A / 250 V AC1
EAN code
HRH-7: 8595188149471
Technical parameters
HRH-7
2
A1 - A2
24... 240 V AC/ DC (AC 50-60 Hz)
max. 2 VA
-15 %; +10 %
adjustable from 5 kΩ -100 kΩ
max. AC 3.5 V
AC < 0.1 mA
max. 400 ms
800 nF (sensitivity 5kΩ), 100 nF (sensitivity 100 kΩ
adjustable, 0.5 -10 sec
1.5 sec
H
Output indication
C
Supply voltage indication
D
Terminals for connecting the probes
Output contacts
PE
A1
A2
16
15
18
Open
connecting
terminal PE
Supply voltage terminals
±5%
PG13.5
PG13.5
Sensitivity setting of probe
1x changeover / DPDT (AgSnO2 )
16 A / AC1
15-18: 6A / AC3
15-16: 3A / AC3
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W /DC
250 V AC / 24 V DC
500 mW
3x107
0.7x105
Switching capacity:
Switching voltage:
Minimum switching capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
Storage temperature:
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
Electrical strength:
3.75 kV (supply - sensor)
Operating position:
any
Protection:
IP65
Overvoltage category:
III.
Contamination degree:
2
Cable size (mm2):
max.1x 4, max.2x2.5 / with sleeve max. 1x2.5, 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
4.5˝ x 4.5˝ x 2.2˝ (114 x 114 x 56 mm)
Dimension:
7.8 oz. (220 g)
Weight:
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Related standards:
see pg. 66
Recommended measuring probes:
Symbol
A1
16
18
C
D
H
A1
64
Adjustment elements
PG13.5
Function:
Supply terminals:
Supply voltage:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Sensitivity (input resistance):
Voltage on electrodes:
Current on probes:
Time response:
Max. capacity of probe cable:
Time delay (t):
Time delay (t1):
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Device description
15
Adjustment elements
(inside device)
Adjustment of delay
Choice of function
Connection
connection for power supply 24... 240V AC/DC
H
C
D
max
Tank with
monitored level
PE A1 A2 16 15 18
min
M
Un 24... 240V AC/DC
L
N
PE
Level switch HRH-7
Function
Function PUMP-UP
Function PUMP-DOWN
Un
max
level
min
Un
max
level
min
t
t
15-18
t
15-18
t
red LED
red LED
An AC current is used for measuring to prevent polarization and electrolysis of fluid and unwanted oxidation of measuring probes. Three probes are used for measuring: H - upper level, D - lower level and
C - common probe. If using a tank made from conductive material, it is possible to use the tank itself as probe C.
If it is necessary to monitor only one level, there are two connection options:
1. Inputs H and D are connected to a single probe - in this case the sensitivity is decreased to half (2.5... 50kΩ).
2. Inputs H and C are connected and the probe is connected to input D - in this case, the original sensitivity remains (5... 100kΩ).
It is also possible to connect probe C with a protective conductor of the power system (PE).
Example of connecting the level switch to a 1-phase pump at a well, borehole
wiring for supply 120 V AC (for monitoring two levels)
H
C
D
max
PE A1 A2 16 15 18
well
M
min
L
N
PE
Monitoring TWO LEVELS of the FLUID LEVEL minimum / maximum– DRAINING function – (PUMP DOWN)
Monitoring TWO LEVELS minimum / maximum– REPLENISHING function – (PUMP UP)
Description of draining function:
This function is used in a well or borehole where the difference between the upper and lower probes determines how
much water the pump can pump out and protect against running dry.
After detecting the maximum level, the set reaction delay begins running. After this period, the output contact
immediately switches on the pump until the minimum level is reached, when the set delay begins running once again.
The pump then switches off.
Description of replenishing function:
This function is used when you need to regularly pump in water to a well or borehole, which is leaking.
After detecting the minimum level, the set reaction delay begins running. After this period, the output contact
immediately switches on the pump for the period until it reaches the maximum level, where the set delay begins running
once again. The pump then switches off.
Example of connecting the level switch to a 3-phase pump at the well, borehole
wiring for supply 120 V AC (for monitoring two levels)
Monitoring TWO LEVELS minimum / maximum– DRAINING function – (PUMP DOWN)
Description of draining function:
The function is used to protect against overflows and flooding of areas.
After detecting the maximum level, the set reaction delay begins running. After this period, the output contact
immediately switches on the 3-phase pump until the minimum level is reached, when the set delay begins running once
again. The pump then switches off.
H
C
D
VS425-4
120 V AC/DC
max
PE A1 A2 16 15 18
min
well
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
M
protection
element
65
Level switches accessories - Level sensors SHR
SHR-1-M: brass sensor
SHR-1-N: stainless steel sensor
! Sensor to control flooding
! Electrode with diametr 0.2” (4 mm) is placed in plastic cover
! Panel or to holder mounting
! Conductor is connected to terminal board, shrink bushing for feeder place insulation is a part of device
! Max. wire profile: 2.5 mm2 (AWG10)
! Installation: after connecting a wire to the sensor, run the shrink bushing over the wire onto the sensor.
! Heat the sensor and by shrinking the connection of sensor and wire will be hermetical
! Weight: 0.3 oz. (9.7 g)
SHR-1-M
! Operating temperature: -13 °F to 140 °F (-25 °C to +60 °C)
SHR-1-N
! Total sensor lenght: 2.58 ” (65.5mm)
EAN code
SHR-1-M: 8595188110105
SHR-1-N: 8595188111379
Level probe SHR-2
Detection sensor is electrode, which in connection with switchable device is used for level detection for example in
wells, tanks...
! To be ued in electric conductive fluids and mechanically polluted fluids with temperature: 33.8 °F to 176°F (+1 °C to +80 °C)
! Stainless steel one-pole electrode reside in PVC cover, intended for tank wall mounting or mounting by socket
! To ensure corret function of the sensor, it is necessary to have the electrode without dirt which could disable the
connection of the electrode and fluid and thus lead to malfunction
2
! Max. wire profile: 2.5 mm (AWG10)
! Recomended wire D05V-K0.75/3.2
! Installation:
- conductor wire is connected by feazing of two brass screws to stainless steel electrode
- conductor is caulked by bushing Pg7 with protection degree IP68
! Weight: 1.7 oz. (48.6 g)
! Dimensions: max. diameter 0.8” (21 mm), lenght 3.8” (96 mm)
!
EAN code
SHR-2: 8595188111263
SHR-2 in open state
Level probe SHR-3
! Stainless probe to be used into demanding industrial environments, designated for screwing into tank wall or cover
! The probe is installed in horisontal, vertical or in sidelong position on tank side or in tank cover. Installation is done by
EAN code
SHR-3: 8595188111270
66
soldering or by fixing nut. It is necessary to use 1” (24 mm) screw. It is necessary to use an adequate torque with regards
to a seal and operational overpressure in a tank.
! Sensor has connecting wire - lenght 39.4” (3 m), which is connected to sensor to scan electrode and sensor bushing
connecting wire is double-wire PVC AWG 18 (0.75 mm2), connection of wires: brown - scan electrode, blue - sensor
bushing.
! Connection M18x1.5 screw
! Protection degree IP 67
! Sensor weight without cable: 3.3 oz. (100 g)
! Operating surroundings: place without the danger of detonation, temperature on screw: max. 203 °F (95°C)
! Pressure immunity: on 77 °F (25 °C) 4 MPa, on 203 °F (95°C) 1.5 MPa
! Weight: 8.4 oz. (239 g)
! Material: bushing and sean electrode: stainless steel W.Nr. 1.4301, insulation insert of electrode: PTFE
! Internal material: self - extinguishing epoxide resin
! Operating temperature: -13 °F to 140 °F (-25 °C to +60 °C)
! Total sensor lenght: 2.58 ” (65.5mm)
! Dimensions: see pg 93
Thermostats and hygrostats
Analog
TER
TER-3A
TER-3B
TER-3C
TER-3D
TER-3E
TER-3F
TER-3G
TER-3H
-22 °F to 50 °F
(-30 to +10 °C)
external NTC
32 °F to 104 °F
(0 °C to +40 °C)
external NTC
86 °F to 158 °F
(+30 °C to +70 °C)
external NTC
32 °F to 140 °F
(0 °C to +60 °C)
external NTC
32 °F to 140 °F
(0 °C to +60 °C)
external NTC
32 °F to 140 °F
(0 °C to +60 °C)
in-built NTC
32 °F to 140 °F
(0 °C to +60 °C)
external PT100
5 °F to 113 °F
(-15 °C to +45 °C)
external NTC
TER-4
TER-7
Wide and accurate range of setting -40 °F to 230 °F
(-40 to +110 °C) in ten ranges in one device, fine temperature
setting. 2 inputs for NTC senzor, 2 outputs 16 A changeover /
SPDT, additional function (memory, hysteresis, indication of faulty
sensor). Supply: AC/DC 24 V (galv. separated).
Monitoring heating of motor winding in range given
by resistance of in-built PTC thermistor (1.8-3.3 kΩ),
additional function (memory, reset), output contact
2x 8A changeover / DPDT, supply: AC/ DC 24-240 V.
Digital
TER
TER-9 Digital
2 temperature inputs, 2 outputs 8A changeover /
SPDT, 6 functions, in-built time switch clock, LCD with
back light, galvanically sep. supply voltage AC 120 V
or AC/DC 24V, 2 MODULE. Temperature range:
-40 to 230 °F (-40 °C to +110 °C).
Thermovalve
ATV-1
Accessories
to thermostats
Hygrothermostat
Energy-saving digital
thermostat for
radiators, with temperature range +46.. +82°F
(+8..+28°C).
RHT-1
Hygro-thermostat for
temperature monitoring and
regulation in range
+32 to +140 °F (0 to + 60 °C)
and relative humidity
monitoring and regulation in
range 50...90%.
TC, TZ , PT-100
External temperature sensors for
thermostats in lengths 9.8´ (3m), 19.7´ (6m),
29.5´(12m)
-TC/TZ: thermistor NTC 12 kΩ / 77 °F (25 °C)
PT: element PT-100 (only TER-3G).
67
Overview table
Supply
In-built
External
Type
AC 230V
AC 24V
AC/DC 24 ..240V
Galv. separated
Temperature range
Hysteresis
#
x
x
#
NTC
x
x
#
x
-22 °F to 50 °F
(-30 to +10 °C)
32.9 to 41 °F
(0.5 -5 °C)
x
single thermostat into a switchboard with external sensor
for temperature in cooling and against freezing
69
TER-3B
1M-DIN
#
x
x
#
NTC
x
x
#
x
32 °F to 104 °F
(0 to 40 °C)
32.9 to 41 °F
(0.5 -5 °C)
x
single thermostat into a switchboards with external sensor
for sensing room and operational temperature
69
TER-3C
1M-DIN
#
x
x
#
NTC
x
x
#
x
86 °F to 158 °F
(+30 to +70 °C)
32.9 to 41 °F
(0.5 -5 °C)
x
single thermostat into a switchboards with external sensor
for sensing temperature in devices (overheating...)
69
TER-3D
1M-DIN
#
x
x
#
NTC
x
x
#
x
32 °F to 140 °F
(0 to + 60 °C)
32.9 to 41 °F
(0.5 -5 °C)
x
single thermostat into a switchboard with external sensor
for sensing operational temperature of machines and
devices
69
TER-3E
1M-DIN
#
x
x
#
NTC
x
x
#
x
32 °F to 140 °F
(0 to + 60 °C))
34 °F
(1 °C)
x
as TER-3D but with fixed hysteresis
70
TER-3F
1M-DIN
#
x
#
x
NTC
x
x
#
x
32 °F to 140 °F
(0 to + 60 °C)
34 °F
(1 °C)
x
single thermostat into a switchboard with in-built sensor,
monitors operational temperature in a switchboard
70
TER-3G
1M-DIN
#
x
x
# PT100
x
x
#
x
32 °F to 140 °F
(0 to + 60 °C)
32.9 to 41 °F
(0.5 -5 °C)
x
as TER-3D but with input for sensor PT100
69
TER-3H
1M-DIN
#
x
x
#
x
x
#
x
5 °F to 113 °F
(-15 to +45 °C)
32.9 to 41 °F
(0.5 -5 °C)
x
as TER-3A but with a different temperature range - for
cooling and heating
69
TER-4
3M-DIN
#
x
x
# -40 °F to 230 °F
32.9 to 37 °F
(0.5 - 2.5 °C)
x
two-state thermostat (2 inputs, 2 outputs), two
independent or dependent thermostats, accurate setting,
wide temperature range
71
TER-9
2M-DIN
x
#
x
# -40 °F to 230 °F
x
multifunction (6 thermo functions) digital thermostat with
in-built time switch clock, 2 inputs / 2 outputs
72
TER-7
1M-DIN
#
x
x
32.9 to 41 °F
(0.5 - 5 °C)
Resistance
1.8-3.3 kΩ
x
thermistor relay for protection of motor overheating, input
designated for sensor PTC in-built in motor winding
74
ATV-1
valve
x
x
x
thermostatic direction valves, temperature regulation
46.4°F to 82.4°F (+8..+28°C)
75
RHT-1
1M-DIN
#
HH36.5
-- 44 %
%°F
T-T-(2.5
2.5°C)°C
50.. 90%
hygro-thermostat for temperature monitoring and
regulation in range 32 to 140 °F (0 °C to +60 °C)
and relative humidity in range 50.. 90%
76
68
#
(2x)
#
(2x)
#
NTC
NTC
# #
x
NTC
# #
x
PTC
(-40.. +110 °C)
(-40.. +110 °C)
x
x
#
x
x
# #
x
built -in x
x
x
x
46.4°F to 82.4°F
(+8.. +28 °C)
#
x
built -in x
x
#
x
32 °F to 140 °F
(0.. +60 °C)
x
Page of catalogue
Digital
1M-DIN
Designation
Analog
TER-3A
Relative humidity
Design
Sensor
Type
Type
Thermostats range TER-3 (A, B, C, D, G, H)
! Single thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation
! It
in range -22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C) in six ranges
can be used for monitoring temperature e.g. in switchboards, heating systems, cooling systems, liquids, radiators,
motors, devices, open spaces, etc.
! Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring
! Possibility to set function “heating” / ”cooling” (setting is done by DIP switch)
! Adjustable hysteresis (sensitivity), switching by potentiometer in range 32.9 to 41 °F (0.5 to 5°C)
! Choice of external temperature sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´ (3, 6 and 12 m)
! It is possible to place sensor directly on terminal block – for temperature monitoring in a switchboard or in its surroundings
EAN code
TER-3A: 8595188138390
TER-3B: 8595188138406
TER-3C: 8595188138413
TER-3D: 8595188138420
TER-3G: 8595188138451
TER-3H: 8595188138468
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperature range:
(according to product type
sensitivity)
Hysteresis:
Sensor:
Sensor fault indication
(short circuit/disconnect):
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech.):
Switching difference:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
! Multivoltage supply AC/DC 24 -240 V, not galvanically separated
! Output contact 1x NO - SPST 16 A /250 V AC1
! Red LED indicates status of output, green LED indicates energization of the device
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
TER-3
Symbol
Connection
single level
A1-A2
AC/DC 24 - 240V (galvanically unseparated) (AC 50-60Hz)
2 VA
- 15 %; + 10 %
T1 - T1
TER-3A TER - 3A: -30.. +10 °C TER-3D
TER - 3D:
0.. +60 °C
-22 °F to 50 °F (-30 °C to +10 °C)
32 °F to 140 °F (0 °C to +60 °C)
TER-3B TER - 3B: 0.. +40 °C TER-3G
3G:°F to 140
0.. °F+60
32 °F to 104 °F (0 °C to +40 °C) TER - 32
(0 °C°Cto +60 °C)
TER-3C
TER-3H
3C:°F +30..
°C°C) TER -53H:
-15..°F +45
86 TER
°F to -158
(+30 °C+70
to +70
°F to 113
(-15 °C°C
to +45 °C)
ajustable in range 32.9 to 41 °F (0.5 to 5°C)
external, thermistor NTC, except for TER-3G (PT100)
sensor
T1
T1
Un
A2
1x NO-SPST (AgSnO2)
16A / AC1, 10A / 24V DC
4000 VA / AC1, 300 W / DC
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
15
Function
A1
A2
T1
T1
15
18
Un
Temperature
Hysteresis
Heating
15-18
LED
Cooling
15-18
LED
Test
15-18
LED
flashing red LED
5%
32.9 °F (0.5 °C)
< 0.1 % / °F (°C)
18
A1
]
]
]
]
15-18
LED
COOL
RUN
HEAT
TEST
COOL
RUN
HEAT
TEST
COOL
RUN
HEAT
TEST
short-circuit or
sensor disconnection
It is a single but practical thermostat with separated sensor for monitoring temperature. Device is placed
in a switchboard and external sensor senses temperature of required space, object, or liquid. Supply is
not galvanically separated from sensor. Sensor is double insulated. Maximal length of delivered sensor is
29.5´ (12m). Device has in-built indication of sensor damage, which means that in case of short-circuit
or disconnection red LED flashes. Thanks to adjustable hysteresis, it is advantageous to regulate width of
the range and thus define sensitivity of load switching. Sensed temperature is decreased by set hysteresis.
When installing it is necessary to keep in mind that hysteresis is increased by temperature gradient between
sensor’s jacket and thermistor.
Description
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
2.5 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x 2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x 1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.6 oz. (73 g)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
Supply terminals
A1
Sensor terminals
A2
T1
T1
Output indication
Supply voltage indication
Heating / cooling selection
Function TEST
Temperature adjusting
Hysteresis adjusting
Example of an order
Please specify a type of thermostat in your order (TER-3A, TER-3B .. or TER-3H) types differ in
temperature range and supply voltage.
15
18
Output contact
69
Thermostats range TER-3 (E, F)
! Single thermostat
! It
for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 32 °F to 140 °F (0 to +60 °C)
can be used for temperature monitoring e.g. in switchboards, heating systems, liquids, radiators, motors, devices,
open spaces, etc.
! Fixed hysteresis at 32 °F (1 °C)
! TER-3E - choice of external temperature sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 9.8´, 19.7´ and 29.5´ (3, 6 and 12 m)
! TER-3F - sensor is a part of device, serves for monitoring temperature in a switchboard
! Supply voltage AC /DC
! Output contact 1x
24 - 240 V
NO- SPST 16 A / 250 V AC1
! Output status is indicated by red LED
EAN code
TER-3E:
TER-3F:
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
8595188138437
8595188138444
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperature range:
Hysteresis:
Sensor:
Sensor fault indic. (short-circuit /
disconnection):
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech.):
Switching difference:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
TER-3E
TER-3F
Connection
external sensor
single level
A1-A2
AC /DC 24 - 240 V (AC 50-60Hz)
2 VA
- 15 %; +10 %
Un
18
A1
T1
T1 - T1
x
32 °F to 140 °F (0 to +60 °C)
fixed 34 °F (1 °C)
thermistor NTC
in-built
Un
A1
A2
T1
T1
A1
A2
T1
A2
TER-3E
15
15
TER-3F
18
15
18
flashing red LED
Description
5%
32.9 °F (0.5 °C)
< 0.1 % / °F (°C)
A1
A2
T1
1x NO- SPST (AgSnO2)
16A / AC1,10 A / 24 V DC
4000 VA / AC1, 300 W / DC
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
T1
Supply voltage terminals
External sensor
terminal
Supply voltage
indication
Output
indication
Temperature
adjusting
Supply voltage terminals
A1
A2
Output
indication
Supply voltage
indication
Temperature
adjusting
Sensor
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
2.5 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x 2.5 or 1x4
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x 1.5 AWG 12
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.58 oz. (73 g)
2.61 oz. (74 g)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
Example of an order
Please specify a type of thermostat in your order (TER-3E , TER-3F).
70
Symbol
15
18
Output
contacts
15
18
Output
contacts
Function
TER-3E, TER-3F
TEMPERATURE
HYSTERESIS=1K
It is a single thermostat for temperature monitoring with separated sensor (except for TER-3F). Device is
located in a switchboard and external sensor senses temperature of required space, object or liquid. Supply is
not galvanically separated from sensor but sensor is double insulated. Maximal length of sensor cable is 29.5´
(12 m). Temperature sensing is decreased by set hysteresis. When installing it is necessary to keep in mind that
hysteresis is increased by temperature gradient between sensor’s jacket and thermistor.
2-stage thermostat TER-4
! Two-state thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in a wide range -40 °F to 230 °F (-40 °C to +110 °C)
with a switch for temperature ranges shift and fine temperature setting (high accuracy of setting)
! It can be used for temperature monitoring in e.g. switchboards, heating systems, cooling systems, open spaces, objects,
liquids, radiators, etc.
! 2 thermo inputs for sensor NTC 12 kΩ / 77 °F (25 °C)
! Possibility to choose if both thermostats should work independently or dependently (by DIP switch)
! Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring
! Possibility to set functions
“heating ” / “cooling ” (setting is done by DIP switch)
°F (0.5 or 2.5 °C) (DIP switch)
! Choice of external thermo sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´ (3, 6 and 12 m)
! It is possible to place the sensor directly on terminal block – to monitor temperature in a switchboard or in its surroundings
! Galvanically separated supply AC/DC 24 V
! 2 independent output with changeover contacts / SPDT 16 A /250 V AC1
! Output status indicated by red LED, faulty status of sensor by yellow LED
! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
! Adjustable hysteresis (sensitivity) of switching 32.9 or 37
EAN code
TER-4 /24V: 8594030338148
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperatue ranges
(set via switch individually for each
level):
Fine temperature setting:
Hysteresis for T1:
Hysteresis for T2:
Sensor:
Sensor failure indication:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech.):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
TER-4
double thermostat
A1-A2
AC/DC 24V galvanically separated
max. 4.5 VA
- 15 %; + 10 %
Connection
Symbol
Un
A1
A2
95 to 122+35..
°F (+35+50
to +50
°C°C)
°F (+50+65
to +65
122 to 149+50..
°C °C)
°F (+65+80
to +80
149 to 176+65..
°C °C)
°F (+80+95
to +95
176 to 203+80..
°C °C)
203 to 230°F
(+95+110
to +110
+95..
°C °C )
32-59 °F (0-15 °C), in selected range
adjustable, 32.9 or 37°F (0.5 or 2.5 °C ) (DIP switch)
adjustable, 32.9 or 37°F (0.5 or 2.5 °C) (DIP switch)
thermistor NTC 12 kΩ / 77 °F (25 °C)
yellow LED
18
26
28
A1 A2 T1 T1 T2 T2
T1
T1
T2
T2
T1-T1 a T2-T2
-40 to-40
77 °F.. (-40
-25to°C-25 °C)
77 to -25
50 °F.. (-25
-10to°C-10 °C)
50 to -10
41 °F.. (-10
+5to°C+5 °C)
41 to+705°F.. (+5
+20to+20
°C °C)
70 to+20
95 °F..(+20
+35to+35
°C °C )
16
1. sensor 2. sensor
15
25
16 15 18 28 25 26
Description
Function: dependent / independent
Function of thermostat:
HEATING / COOLING (inverts output)
Supply voltage indication
Adjusting hysteresis for T1
Adjusting hysteresis for T2
5%
32.9 °F (0.5 °C)
< 0.1 % / °F (°C)
Output contact-relay 1
Temperature adjusting T1
Sensor failure
Temperature adjusting T2
Output contact-relay 2
2x changeover / SPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)
16A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A /< 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝ (90 x 52 x 65 mm)
8.4 oz. (238 g)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
Temperature adjusting fine
Adjusting temperature range
Function
Independent function
Dependent function
Un
Un
T1
H1
T2
H1
15-18
heating
15-18
cooling
Chart information:
Un –supply voltage
T1 –set temperature of thermostat 1
T2 –set temperature of thermostat 2
H1 –set hysteresis of thermostat 1
H2 –set hysteresis of thermostat 2
15-18 output contact of thermostat 1
25-28 output contact of thermostat 2
25-28
T1
15-18
no blocking
15-18
blocking
H2
H2
H1
H1
Blocking function:
When DIP switch 4 is in position ON, condition for
thermostat switching is switching output 15-18 at
both individual thermostats (series function). Thus it is
possible to use e.g. first thermostat as operational and
the other as an emergency one.
Output 25-28 operates normally, according to T2.
This device includes 2 thermostats in one. Thermostat has 2 thermo inputs, 2 outputs and individual temperature setting. It offers two possibilities of use. Firstly it can be used as two individual thermostats
(e.g. for monitoring two temperature levels of one device or as a control of individual devices), secondly it is possible to set depending function of both thermostats, when thermostat 2 blocks thermostat
No.1 Advantage of this thermostats is a wide temperature range -40.. 230 °F (- 40.. +110 °C) (in one device) with very good mechanical accuracy of setting. It is due to 10-state switch for thermo ranges
and its scale by 59 °F (15 °C). VIt is possible to use fine tuning by potentiometer by 32-59 °F (0-15 °C) with accuracy ± 34 °F (1 °C). Device has in-built control of sensor fault (yellow LED). It is possible to
set hysteresis 32.9 or 37 °F (0.5 or 2.5 °C).
It is possible to operate the thermostat only with one sensor. In that case it is necessary to connect a resistor 10 kΩ to the other input. This is included in the package.
71
Multifunction digital thermostat TER-9
! Digital thermostat with 6 functions and built-in time switch clock with day, week and year program.
A1 A2
T1
T1
T2
You can also limit temperature functions and courses this way in real time.
T2
! Complex control of home and water heating, solar heating, etc.
! Two thermostats in one, two temperature inputs, two outputs with dry contact
! Maximum universal and variable thermostat including all ordinary thermostat functions
! Functions: two independent thermostats, dependent thermostat, differential thermostat, two level thermostat,
zone-based thermostat, dead zone thermostat
! Program setting of output functions, calibration of sensors according to reference temperature (offset)
! The thermostat is subject to the digital clock programs
28
15 16 18 25 26
! Wide operating range of temperature settings, the possibility of measuring in °F and °C
! Clear display of set and measured data on a backlit LCD
! Power supply: AC 120 V or 24V AC/DC (based on type of device)
! The time switch clock has a battery backup, which retains data in case of a power outage (reserve backup time - up to 3 years)
! Easy replacement of the backup battery through the plug-in module, no disassembling is required
! Output contact 2x changeover / SPDT
EAN code
TER-9 /120V: 8595188155632
TER-9 /24V: 8595188129190
Technical parameters
Supply
Number of function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Type backup battery:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperature range:
Hysteresis (sensitivity):
Diference temperature:
Sensor:
Sensor failure indication:
Accuracy
Measuring accuracy:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Max. breaking capacity:
Switching voltage:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Time circuit
Power back-up:
Accuracy:
Min. switching interval:
Data stored for:
Program circuit
Number of memory places:
Program:
Data readout:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
72
8 A / 250 V AC1 for each output
! 2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
TER-9
Symbol
Connection
Sensor 1 Sensor 2
Un
6
A1 - A2
AC 120 V or AC/DC 24V (AC 50-60Hz) galvanically unseparated
max. 4 VA
-15 %; +10 %
CR 2032 (3V)
T1-T1 and T2-T2
-40.. +230 °F (-40.. +110 °C)
in an adjustable range 32.9.. 41 °F (0.5.. 5 °C)
adjustable 34..122 °F (1.. 50 °C)
thermistor NTC 12 kΩ at 77 °F (25 °C)
displayed on the LCD
5%
< 32 °F (0.5 °C)
< 0.1 % / °F (°C)
2x changeover for each output / SPDT, (AgNi)
8 A / AC1
2000 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
250 V AC1 / 30 V DC
symbol ON/OFF
1x107
1x105
A1
T1
T1
T2
T2
18
16
26
28
A1 A2 T1 T1 T2 T2
°F (°C)
A2
15
25
15 16 18 25 26 28
Description of visual elements on the display
Displaying the day
Status indication (1st channel)
Status indication (2nd channel)
Auto + t
Prog
Operation mode indication
Displays 12/24 hour mode
Indication of the switching
program
Man
Display of date / temperature
1 and 2 of setting menu
Time display
Control button PRG+
Reset
Control button MAN2 / ESC
TER-9
Control button OK
Control button MAN1 / -
up to 3 year
max. ±1 s per day, at 73,4 °F (23°C)
1 min
min. 10 years
Device description
Sensor-Terminal 1
Sensor-Terminal 2
Supply voltage terminal (A1)(A2)
100
daily, weekly, yearly
LCD display, with back light
A1
A2
T1
T1
T2
T2
Auto
Backlight display
+14 °F to 131 °F (-10 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to 158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (power supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 20 terminals, IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 1.4˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 35.6 x 64 mm)
4.2 oz. (120 g)
EN 61812-1; EN 61010-1; EN 60730-2-9; EN 60730-1; EN 60730-2-7
TER-9
MAN 2
OK
MAN
RESET
Control buttons
ESC
PRG +
_
Lead-sealing point
28
15 16 18 25 26
Plug-in module for replacement
of the backup battery
Output - Channel 1 (15-16-18)
Output - Channel 2 (26-25-28)
Multifunction digital thermostat TER-9
2 independent single-stage thermostats
Heating functions
T1
H1
H1
Ts1
dy1
dy2
dy2
dy1
15-18
Heating functions
T2
H2
H2
Ts2
dy2
dy1
dy2
dy1
25-28
Legend:
Ts1 - real (measured) temperature 1
Ts2 - real (measured) temperature 2
T1 - adjusted temperature T1
T2 - adjusted temperature T2
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2
dy1 - set switching delay of the output
dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact (for T1)
25-28 output contact (for T2)
Classic function of thermostat, output contact switched until adjusted temperature is
reached. Hysteresis eliminates frequent switching - output oscillation.
Legend:
Ts1 - real (measured) temperature 1
Ts2 - real (measured) temperature 2
T1 - adjusted temperature T1
T2 - adjusted temperature T2
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2
dy1- set switching delay of the output
dy2 - set delay on output breaking
25-28 output contact (for T2)
15-18 output contact (intersection T1 and T2)
Output 15-18 is closed, if temperature of both thermostats is bellow an adjusted level.
When any thermostat reaches adjusted level, the contact 15-18 opens.
Serial inner connection of thermostats (logic function AND).
Legend:
Ts1 - real (measured) temperature T1
Ts2 - real (measured) temperature T2
D - adjusted difference
dy1- set switching delay of the output
dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact (for T1)
25-28 output contact (for T2)
Switching of output corresponds with input, which has lower temperatures when
diff ference is exceeded.
Differencial thermostat is used for keeping two identical temperature e.g. in heating
systems (boiler and reservoir), solar systems (collector - reservoir, exchanger), water
heating (water heater, water distribution)etc.
Legend:
Ts - real (measured) temperature
T1 - adjusted temperature
D - adjusted difference
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - T=T1-D
dy1- set switching delay of the output
dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact
25-28 output contact
Typical example of use for two-stage thermostat is e.g in boiler-room, where there
are two biolers from which one is main and the other one is auxiliary. The main boiler
is managed according to set temperature and auxiliary boiler is switched in case
temperature falls under set difference. Thus it helps to the main boiler in case outside
temperature dramatically falls.
In the range of set difference (D) output 15-18 functions as normal thermostat to input
1 (type 1). In case temperature falls under set difference, second output switches too.
Legend:
Ts - real (measured) temperature
T1 - adjusted temperature
T2 - adjusted temperature T=T1-D
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2
dy1- set switching delay of the output
dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact
25-28 output contact
Output is closed (heating) only if temperature is within adjusted range. If temperature is
out of range, the contact opens. T is set as T1-D.
The function is used for protection of gutters against freezing.
Legend:
Ts - real (measured) temperature
T1 - adjusted temperature
T2- T=T1-D
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2
dy1- set switching delay of the output
dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact (heating)
25-28 output contact (cooling)
In case of thermostat with a „dead zone“, it is possible to set temperature T1 and a
difference (respectively a width of dead zone D). If temperature is higher than T1, output
contact of cooling switches ON; if the temperature gets bellow T1, the contact switches
OFF.
If the temperature gets bellow temperature T, the contact of heating switches ON and
it switches OFF when temperature T is exceeded. This function can be used for example
for automatic air warming and cooling in ventilation so the sit is always within the range
T1 and T.
Depending functions of 2 thermostats
H2
Ts2
T2
dy2
dy1
H2
H2
dy2
dy1
25-28
H1
Ts1
T1
dy1 dy2
dy2
dy1
H1
H1
dy1
15-18
dy1 dy2
dy1 dy2
15-18
Differential thermostat
Ts1
D-H1
D
D-H2
D
Ts2
D
dy2
dy1
15-18
dy1
dy2
dy1
25-18
2-stage thermostat
H1
T1
D
T
H1
H1
Ts
H2
H2
H2
dy1 dy2
dy2
dy1
dy1
dy2
15-18
dy1dy2
dy1
25-28
Thermostat with “WINDOW”
T1
H1
Ts
H1
H1
D
H2
H2
H2
T
T2
dy1
dy2
dy1
dy2
dy1
dy2
dy1
dy2
dy1
dy2
dy1
dy2
15-18
25-28
Thermostat with dead zone
H1
T1
Ts
D
H2
H2
H2
T
T2
dy1
dy2
15-18
dy1
25-28
H1
H1
dy2
dy1
73
Thermostat for monitoring temperature of motor winding TER-7
! It monitors motor coil temperature
! Fixed levels of switching
! PTC sensor is used for sensing, it is in-built in motor winding by its manufacturer or there is used an external PTC sensor
! MEMORY function - relay is blocked in an error state until until operator intervention (press RESET button)
! RESET of faulty state:
a) button on the front panel
b) by external contact (remote by two wires)
! Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring, red LED flashing indicates faulty sensor
! Output contact: 2x changeover / DPDT
8 A /250 V AC1
! Red LED shines and indicates exceeded temperature
! Terminals of sensor are galvanically separated, they can be shorted out by terminal PE without damaging the device
! Multivoltage supply AC/DC 24-240 V
EAN code
TER-7: 8595188137164
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Cold sensor resistance:
Upper level:
Botton level:
Sensor:
Sensor failure indication:
Accuracy
Accuracy in repetition:
Switching difference:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (resistive):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
TER-7
Symbol
monitoring temperature of motor winding
A1-A2
AC/DC 24 - 240 V (AC 50-60Hz)
max. 2 VA
-15 %; +10 %
A1
16
18
26
A1
28
25 26 28
PTC
Tb
R
A2
15
25
15 16 18
Ta
-4 °F to 131 °F (-20 °C to +55 °C)
-22 °F to +158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 with sleeve max. 1x2.5 AWG (12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.9 oz. (83 g)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
R Tb
PTC
Description
Supply terminals
Output contacts
A2
A1
25
2x changeover / DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC
10 A /< 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500mW
3x107
0.7x105
A2
Ta
Ta-Tb
50 Ω - 1.5 kΩ
3.3 kΩ
1.8 kΩ
PTC temperature of motor winding
blinking red LED
< 5%
±5%
< 0.1 % / °F (°C)
Connection
28
26
Faulty states indication
Supply voltage indication
MEMORY function
Function TEST
RESET button
15
16
18
Output contacts
Ta
R
Tb
Terminals for sensor and reset
Note
Sensors could be in series in abide with conditions in technical specification - switching limits.
Warning!: In case of supply from the main, neutral wire must be connected to terminal A2.
Function
∞Ω
Ω
3.3 Ω
1.8 Ω
Ω
Ω
red LED
memory
PTC / TK
74
The device controls temperature of motor winding with PTC thermistor which is mostly placed in motor winding or very close to it. Resistance
of PTC thermistor run to max 1.5 kΩ in cold stage.
By temperature increase the resistance goes strongly up and by overrun the limit of 3.3 kΩ the contact of output relay switch off - mostly
contactor controlling a motor. By temperature decrease and thereby decrease of thermistor resistance under 1.8 kΩ the output contact of
relay again switches on. The relay has function “Control of sensor fault“. This controls interruption or disconnection of sensor.When switch is
in position “TK” monitoring of faulty sensor is not functional - it is possibel to connect bimetal sensor with only 2 states: ON or OFF. The device
can work with bi-metal sensor in this position.
Other safety unit is function “Memory”. By temperature overrun (and output switches off ) the output is hold in faulty stage until service hit.
This bring the relay to normal stage (with RESET button) on front panel or by external contact (remote).
Energy-saving digital thermo-valve ATV-1
! This energy-saving digital thermo-valve is a programmable regulation device for various heaters, but mainly radiators
! It can be used to regulate temperature in closed rooms, thus helping to lower heat energy consumption
! Functions:
Manual mode - measuring and checking a manually set temperature
Automatic mode - control between two temperatures based on a set time program:
- comfort temperature (factory settings 70°F / 21°C)
- energy-saving temperature (factory settings 61 °F / 16°C)
! Intervals of heating and energy-saving operation can be set using a freely adjustable time program
! 8 individually programmable switching times per day:
- 4 heating intervals
- 4 energy-saving intervals
EAN code
ATV-1:
8595188160889
USB programming
adapter: 8595188160995
! The device features very quiet operation and long battery life (up 5 years)
! Quick and easy installation
Technical parameters
Other functions
ATV-1
Operating voltage:
Temperature range:
Color:
Dimensions (L x W x H):
Design:
3 V / DC (2 AA batteries 1.5 V / DC AA)
+46.. +82 °F (+ 8.. +28 °C)
white
3˝ x 2.1˝ x 2.4˝ (76.5 x 53.5 x 63 mm)
thermostatic direction valves, electronic
Examples of daily heating program
1. Time function - the desired temperature can be set for a certain adjustable time interval
2. Vacation function - while you‘re gone, you can set and maintain the desired temperature
3. Open window function - when the temperature drops, the heating valve automatically closes in order to
save energy
4. Child safety block - blocking against undesired interference with the thermostat
5. Freeze protection - if the temperature drops below 43 °F (6 °C), the valve opens until the temperature
again exceeds 46 °F (8 °C). This keeps heaters from freezing.
Description of device
73 °F
(23 °C)
72 °F
(22 °C)
72 °F
(22 °C)
73 °F
(23 °C)
heating
heating
heating
heating
BATHROOM
02
Mo
saving
saving
saving
saving
saving
64 °F (18 °C)
64 °F (18 °C)
64 °F (18 °C)
64 °F (18 °C)
64 °F (18 °C)
16:00 - 17:00 20:00 - 21:30
21
Mi
Do
8
Fr
4
Sa
So
:
Display
8:00 - 9:00 10:30 - 12:00
61
Di
AUTO
MANU
Increase temperature
MENU
OK
Button - timer function
Decrease temperature
+
LIVING ROOM
saving
64 °F (18 °C)
9:00 - 10:00
OK button - settings confirmation
Button MENU
73 °F
(23 °C)
heating
heating
70 °F
(21 °C)
saving
saving
64 °F (18 °C)
64 °F (18 °C)
17:00 - 20:30
Adjustment ATV-1
- manual
- via USB programming adapter PROG matic
Using the programming port, in seconds your settings will be transferred into the
thermostat.
Adapters
Type of valve
Heimeier, Junkers Landys+Gyr, MNG,
Honeywell, Braukmann
thread size M 30x1.5
Danfoss RAV
(the valve plunger must be fitted
with the enclosed pin)
Danfoss RA
Package content
Type of adapter
No adapter necessary
+ enclosed pin;
only for RAV
Thermo-valve
2x battery AA1.5V
Adaptors
Manual

Danfoss RAVL
75
Hygro-thermostat RHT-1
! Hygro-thermostat
for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 32 °F to 140 °F (0 °C to +60 °C) and relative
humidity monitoring and regulation in range 50...90%
! Possibility of setting of up to 8 conditions for contact switching and function permanently ON/OFF
! Sensor is a part of the device - designated for measuring in switchboards
! Function of sensor control (damage, disturbances...)
! Fixed setting of temperature hysteresis at 36.5 °F (2.5
°C) and humidity at 4%
! Output state is indicated by red LED
! Supply voltage AC/DC 24-240 V
! Output contact 1x NO-SPST
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
RHT-1: 8595188137263
Device description:
Technical parameters
RHT-1
Function:
Supply terminals:
Input:
Voltage range:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Measuring circuit
Temperature range:
Humidity range:
Temperature hysterisis:
Humidity hysterisis:
Sensor:
Indication of sensor´s fault:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Long-term stability of humidity:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Switched output:
Switched voltage:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life:
Other information
Operational temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh:
Operational position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
hygro-thermostat
A1 - A2
1VA
24-240V AC / DC (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
-15%; +10%
32 °F to 140 °F (0 °C to +60 °C)
50.. 90%
36.5 °F (2.5 °C)
4%
internal
red LED flashing
Output contacts
Ventilative upper oppenings
18
15
TOP
Output indication
Indication of supply voltage
Function setting
Temperature setting
Humidity setting
5%
typical < 0.8% / year
Ventilative lower opennings
1x NO-SPST (AgSnO2)
16A / AC1, 10A / 24V DC
4000 VA / AC1, 300W / DC
250V AC1 / 24V DC
red LED shines
3x107
0.7x105
-4 °F to 140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)
-22 °F to +158 °F (-30 °C to +70 °C)
2.5 kV (supply-output)
vertical, with correct orientation
DIN rail EN 60715
IP40 from front panel, IP10 on terminals
III.
2
max. 2x2:5, max. 1x4
with sleeve max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝ (90 x 17.6 x 64 mm)
2.4 oz. (69 g)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Symbol
A1
15
A2
18
15
18
A2
A1
T
-
+
Un
A2
A1
Supply voltage terminals
Funcions
Choice of function
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
ON
OFF
Relay switched under the following conditions
T > Tset
T < Tset
T > Tset
T < Tset
T < Tset
T > Tset
T < Tset
T > Tset
or
or
or
or
and
and
and
and
relay permanently ON
relay permanently OFF
RH > RHset
RH > RHset
RH < RHset
RH < RHset
RH < RHset
RH < RHset
RH > RHset
RH > RHset
This device is designated for monitoring of parameters of environment (meaning temperature and relative
humidity) in switchboards. It enables setting of eight conditions of constact closing and therefore it is usable
for various types of load (e.g. fans, heating, air-conditioning, dehydrating units...).
While installing it is neccessary to take into account the fact that hysterisis rises by persistence of measured
values between sensor and ambient environment.
The device is equipped by sensor fault detection. In case of sensor fault, exceeding allowed limits (for
temperature -22 °F / -30°C and 176 °F / +80°C; for humidity 5% and 95%) or in case of faulty internal
communcation higher than 50% (due to e.g. high ambient disturbances) contact opens and sensor fault is
indicated. Sensor fault doesn´t have influence on function permanently ON or pemanently OFF.
Note: In case the conditions for switching are not applied, relay is open.
Connection
RH
76
16A/250 V AC1
Accessories to Thermostats - Temperature sensors TC, TZ, PT100
!
Thermister temperature sensors are made of Negative Temperature Co-efficient (NTC) embedded in a PVC or metal
sleeve with a thermally-conductive sealer
!
Sensor TC - lead-in cable to sensor TC is made of wire CYSY 2Dx 0.02” (0.5 mm)
!
Sensor TZ - cable VO3SS-F 2Dx 0.02” (0.5mm) with silicone insulation for use in high temperature applications
- silicone insulation for use in high temperature applications
!
TC
TZ
TC
Technical parameters
- length:
- weight:
- length:
- weight:
- length:
- weight:
8595188110075
8595188110617
8595188110082
8595188110099
TZ-0:
TZ-3:
TZ-6:
TZ-12:
8595188140591
8595188110600
8595188110594
8595188110587
Pt100-3: 8595188136136
Pt100-6: 8595188136143
Pt100-12: 8595188136150
Resistive values of sensors in dependance on temperature
Pt100
32 °F to 158 °F (0 °C to +70 °C) -40°F to 257°F (-40°C to +125°C) -22°F to 392°F (-30°C to +200°C)
NTC 12K 5 %
(τ65)
92 s / 23 s
(τ95) 306 s / 56 s
High temperature PVC
High temperature PVC
IP 67
-
NTC 12K 5 %
(τ65)
62 s / 8 s
(τ95)
216 s / 23 s
Silicone
Nickel plated copper
IP 67
-
PT 100
(τ0.5)
-/7s
(τ0.9)
- / 19 s
Silicone
Copper
IP 67
Double insulation by silicone
TC-0
3.9˝ (100 mm)
0.2 oz. (5 g)
TC-3
9.8´ (3 m)
3.8 oz. (108 g)
TC-6
19.7´ (6 m)
7.5 oz. (213 g)
TC-12
29.5´ (12 m)
16.4 oz. (466 g)
TZ-0
3.9˝ (110 mm)
0.2 oz. (4.5 g)
TZ-3
9.8´ (3 m)
3.7 oz. (106 g)
TZ-6
19.7´ (6 m)
7.6 oz. (216 g)
TZ1-2
29.5´ (12 m)
14.8 oz. (418 g)
Pt100-3
9.8´ (3 m)
2.4 oz. (68 g)
Pt100-6
19.7´ (6 m)
5.3 oz. (149 g)
Pt100-12
29.5´ (12 m)
8.8 oz. (249 g)
Temperature (°C / °F)
20 / 68
30 / 86
40 / 104
50 / 122
60 / 140
70 / 158
Sensor NTC (kΩ)
14.7
9.8
6.6
4.6
3.2
2.3
Sensor PT100 (Ω)
107.8
111.7
115.5
119.4
123.2
127.1
Tolerance of sensor NTC 12 kΩ is ± 5% by 77°F (25 °C).
Long-term resistence stability by sensor PT100 is 0.05% (10 000 hours).
Diagramm of sensor warm up via air
70
PVC
Silikon
60
50
o
- length:
- weight:
TZ
EAN code
TC-0:
TC-3:
TC-6:
TC-12:
a [ C]
Range:
Scanning element:
In air / in water:
In air / in water:
Cable material:
Terminal material:
Protection degree:
Insulation:
Types of temperature sensors:
Pt100
Sensor PT100 - shielded silicon 2x 0.22 mm 2 (AWG 21), shielding connected with a case
40
30
20
10
0
00:00
τ65 (95): time, which sensor needs to heat up on 65 (95) % of ambient temperature of environment, in which is located
02:53
05:46
08:38
11:31
14:24
17:17
s [min]
PVC -reaction to water temperature from 72.5 °F to 136.4 °F (from 22.5 1 °C to 58 °C).
Silicone - reaction to water temperature from 72.5 °F to 144.5 °F (from 22.5 °C to 63.5 °C).
Sensor photo
TC
TZ
Pt100
77
Notes
78
Installation contactors
Installation contactors VS
VS120
VS220
VS420
VS425
VS440
VS463
Number of contacts:
1x20 A
Configuration of
switching and breaking
contacts: 10, 01.
Number of contacts:
2x20 A
Configuration of
switching and breaking
contacts: 20, 11, 02.
Number of contacts:
4x20 A
Configuration of
switching and breaking
contacts: 40, 31.
Number of contacts:
4x25 A
Configuration of
switching and breaking
contacts:
40, 31, 22, 04.
Number of contacts:
4x40 A
Configuration of
switching and breaking
contacts:
40, 31, 22, 04.
Number of contacts:
4x63 A
Configuration of
switching and breaking
contacts:
40, 31, 22.
Installation contactors with manual control VSM
VSM220
VSM425
Number of contacts:
2x20 A
Configuration of
switching and breaking
contacts: 20, 11, 02.
Number of contacts:
4x25 A
Configuration of
switching and breaking
contacts:
40, 31, 22, 04
Accessories
VSK-11
VSK-20
Auxiliary contacts:
1x switching,
1x breaking.
Auxiliary contacts:
2x switching.
79
Installation contactors VS120, VS220, VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463
! For switching electric circuits, especially for resistave loads and three-phase induction motors
number of contacts VS120:
1
number of contacts VS220:
2
number of contacts VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463: 4
! It is produced in configuration of switching and breaking contacts:
VS120:
10, 01
VS220:
20, 11, 02
VS420:
40, 31
VS425:
40, 31, 22, 04
VS440:
40, 31, 22, 04
VS463:
40, 31, 22
! Protection IP 20 - on request we deliver covers that ensure protection IP 40 for all terminals
! DIN rail or panel mounting
EAN code
see page 84
Technical parameters
Rated insulation voltage (Ui):
Rated thermo-current lth (in AC):
Switched operation
AC-1 for 400 V, 3 phase:
AC-1 for 230 V:
AC-3 for 400 V, 3 phase:
AC-3 for 230 V:
AC-7a for 400 V, 3 phase:
AC-7a for 230 V:
AC-7b for 400 V, 3 phase:
AC-7b for 230 V:
AC-15 for 400 V, 1 phase:
AC-15 for 230 V, 1 phase:
DC1 Ue = 24 V:
DC1 Ue = 110 V:
DC1 Ue = 220 V:
Loadability of modular contactors see page 83
The max. number of switching for max. load:
Electrical life in 230 / 400 V
AC-1- resistive load :
AC-3-power load:
AC-5a - high-intensity discharge lamp:
AC-5b - incandescent lamps :
AC-7a - resistive household devices:
AC-7b - inductive household devices:
Minimal load:
Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM:
Coordination Type according EN 60 947-4-1:
Electrical strenght:
Contacts - max. cable size:
Solid conductor:
Stranded conductor:
Maximal torque:
Coil - max. cable size:
Solid conductor:
Stranded conductor:
Max. torque:
Operating
Coil control voltage:
Coil permanent supply +/- 10 %:
Coil gear supply +/- 10 %:
Mounting side-by-side:
Operational temperature:
Storing temperature:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Standards:
VS120
VS220
VS420
VS425
VS440
VS463
230 V
20 A
230 V
20 A
415 V
20 A
440 V
25 A
440 V
40 A
440 V
63 A
x
4 kW, 1 phase
x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
x
4 kW, 1 phase
x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
4A
6A
20 A
6A
0.6 A
x
4 kW, 1 phase
x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
x
4 kW, 1 phase
x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
4A
6A
20 A
6A
0.6 A
13 kW
7.5 kW, 3 phase
2,2 kW
1.1 kW, 3 phase
13 kW
7.5 kW, 3 phase
2,2 kW
1.1 kW, 3 phase
4A
6A
20 A
2A
0.5 A
16 kW
9 kW, 3 phase
4 kW
2.2 kW, 3 phase
16 kW
9 kW, 3 phase
4 kW
2.2 kW, 3 phase
4A
6A
25 A
6A
0.6 A
26 kW
16 kW, 3 phase
11 kW
5.5 kW, 3 phase
26 kW
16 kW, 3 phase
11 kW
5.5 kW, 3 phase
4A
6A
40 A
4A
1.2 A
40 kW
24 kW, 3 phase
15 kW
8.5 kW, 3 phase
40 kW
24 kW, 3 phase
15 kW
8.5 kW, 3 phase
4A
6A
63 A
4A
1.2 A
600 switch/hr.
600 switch/hr.
600 switch/hr.
600 switch/hr.
600 switch/hr.
0.2x106
0.3x106
0.1x106 by 30 μF
0.1x106 by 2 kW
0.2x106
0.3x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
20 A
2
4 kV
0.2x106
0.3x106
0.1x106 by 30 μF
0.1x106 by 2 kW
0.2x106
0.3x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
20 A
2
4 kV
0.2x106
0.3x106
0.3x106 by 36 μF
0.1x106 by 2 kW
0.2x106
0.3x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
20 A
2
4 kV
0.2x106
0.5x106
0.1x106 by 36 μF
0.1x106 by 2 kW
0.2x106
0.3x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
25 A
2
4 kV
0.1x106
0.15x106
0.1x106 by 220 μF
0.1x106 by 4 kW
0.1x106
0.15x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
63 A
2
4 kV
0.1x106
0.15x106
0.1x106 by 330 μF
0.1x106 by 5 kW
0.1x106
0.15x106
≥ 24 V, ≥ 100 mA
80 A
2
4 kV
AWG 7 (10 mm2)
6 mm2
1.2 Nm
AWG 7 (10 mm2)
6 mm2
1.2 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
1.2 Nm
AWG 7 (10 mm2)
6 mm2
1.2 Nm
AWG 3 (25 mm2)
16 mm2
3.5 Nm
AWG 3 (25 mm2)
16 mm2
3.5 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
2.1 VA/2.1 W
2.1 VA/2.1 W
max. 2 contactors**
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
2.1 VA/2.1 W
2.1 VA/2.1 W
max. 2 contactors**
AC 24 V, 48 V
110 V, 230 V
5 VA/1.5 W
30 VA/25 W
max. 2 contactors**
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
2.6 VA/2.6 W *
2.6 VA/2.6 W *
max. 2 contactors**
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
5 VA/5 W
5 VA/5 W
max. 2 contactors**
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
5 VA/5 W
5 VA/5 W
max. 2 contactors**
4.6 oz. (130 g)
0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝
(17.5 x 85 x 60 mm)
23.. 131 °F (-5.. +55 °C)
-22.. 176 °F (-30.. +80 °C)
6 oz. (170 g)
7.5 oz. (213 g)
1.4˝x 2.7˝x 2.24˝
1.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝
(35 x 62.5 x 57 mm)
(35 x 85 x 60 mm)
14 oz. (400 g)
2.1˝x 3.31˝x 2.4˝
(53.3 x 84 x 60 mm)
14 oz. (400 g)
2.1˝x 3.31˝x 2.4˝
(53.3 x 84 x 60 mm)
4.2 oz. (120 g)
0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝
(17.5 x 85 x 60 mm)
600 switch/hr.
IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 61095, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, EN 61095, VDE 0660
* 3.8 VA/3,8 W for -04 version of contacts
** Note: In case several contactors are mounted close to each other, you need to use a installation spacer between every other contactor. We offer installation spacer of type IKV.
80
Connection
VS120
VS120-10
VS120-01
1
A1 +
R1
A1 +
2
A2 -
R2
A2
VS220-11
VS220-20
VS220
VS220-02
1
3
A1 +
1
R3
A1 +
R1
R3
A1 +
2
4
A2 -
2
R4
A2 -
R2
R4
A2 -
VS420-40
VS420
VS420-31
1
3
5
7 13
A1
1
3
5
21
A1
2
4
6
8 14
A2
2
4
6
22
A2
VS425-40
VS425
VS425-31
1 13 3 23 5 33 7 43
A1 +
1 13 3 23 5 33 R7 41
A1 +
2 14 4 24 6 34 8 44
A2 -
2 14 4 24 6 34 R8 42
A2 -
VS425-22
VS440
VS425-04
1 13 R3 21 R5 31
7 43
+
A1
2 14 R4 22 R6 32
8 44
A2 -
VS440-40
R1 11 R3 21 R5 31 R7 41
A1 +
R2 12 R4 22 R6 32 R8 42
A2 -
VS440-31
1
3
5
7 13
A1 +
1
3
5
R3
A1 +
2
4
6
8 14
A2 -
2
4
6
R4
A2 -
R1
R3
R5
R7
A1 +
R2
R4
R6
R8
A2 -
VS440-22
VS463
-
VS440-04
1
R3
R5
7
A1 +
2
R4
R6
8
A2 -
VS463-40
VS463-31
VS463-22
1
3
5
7 (13)
A1 +
1
3
5
R3
A1 +
1
R3
R5
7
A1 +
2
4
6
8 (14)
A2 -
2
4
6
R4
A2 -
2
R4
R6
8
A2-
Auxiliary contacts for VS425, VS440, VS463 and VSM220, VSM425
Datas of auxiliary contacts for VSK-11 and VSK-20
Ambient temperature:
Rated insulation voltage (Ui):
Electrical strength:
Rated current 230 V (AC 15):
Rated current 400 V (AC 15):
Max. switching frequence:
The max. number of switching for max. load:
Minimal load:
Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM:
Solid/ Stranded conductor (max):
Maximal torque:
Weight:
Dimensions:
23 °F to 131 °F (-5 °C to +55 °C)
500 V
4 kV
6A
4A
6A
600 sep./hod.
≥ 12 V, ≥ 10 mA
6A
2.5 mm² (AWG 10) / 2.5 mm² (AWG 10)
0.8 Nm
0.35 oz. (10 g)
0.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝ (10 x 85 x 60 mm)
Connection of auxiliary contact VSK-11 and VSK-20
EAN code
see page 84
VSK-11
31 43
32 44
VSK-20
23 33
24
34
81
Installation contactors with manual control VSM220, VSM425
! Special version of installation contactors with not only basic functions but also with manual control
! For switching accumulative appliances for heating and service water warming
! Description of individual positions of manual control
AUTO: common function as with installation contactors without manualcontrol
1: shifting from AUTO to 1: operational contacts are closed and back contacts are open until there is
another impulse to a contactor coil
0: contacts are open (operational contact) or closed (stand-by contact) regardless voltage
! Optical indicator: ON-OFF
! It is produced in configuration of making and breaking contacts:
VSM220: 20, 11, 02
VSM425: 40, 31, 22, 04
! It is possible to connect auxiliary contacts VSK to contactors VSM220, VSM425
EAN code
see page 84
Technical parameters
Rated insulation voltage (Ui):
Rated thermo-current lth (in AC):
Switched operation
AC-1 for 400 V:
AC-1 for 230 V:
AC-3 for 400 V:
AC-3 for 230 V:
AC-7a for 400 V:
AC-7a for 230 V:
AC-7b for 400 V:
AC-7b for 230 V:
AC-15 for 400 V:
AC-15 for 230 V:
DC1 Ue = 24 V:
DC1 Ue = 110 V:
DC1 Ue = 220 V:
Loadability of modular contactors see page 83
The max. number of switching for max. load:
Electrical life in 230 / 400 V
AC-1- resistive load :
AC-3-power load:
AC-5a - high-intensity discharge lamp:
AC-5b - incandescent lamps :
AC-7a - resistive household devices:
AC-7b - inductive household devices:
Minimal load:
Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM:
Coordination Type according EN 60 947-4-1:
Electrical strenght:
Contacts - max. cable size
Solid conductor:
Stranded conductor:
Maximal torque:
Coil - max. cable size:
Solid conductor:
Stranded conductor:
Max. torque:
Operating
Coil control voltage:
Coil permanent supply +/- 10 %:
Coil gear supply +/- 10 %:
Mounting side-by-side:
Operational temperature:
Storing temperature:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Standards:
VSM220
VSM425
VSM220 - only AC supply voltage
Connection VSM220
VSM220-20
230 V
20 A
440 V
25 A
x
4 kW, 1 phase
x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
x
4 kW, 1 phase
x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
4A
6A
20 A
6A
0.6 A
16 kW, 3 phase
9 kW, 3 phase
4 kW, 3 phase
2.2 kW, 3 phase
16 kW, 3 phase
9 kW, 3 phase
4 kW, 3 phase
2.2 kW, 3 phase
4A
6A
25 A
6A
0.6 A
600 switch/hr.
600 switch/hr.
VSM220-11
1
3
A1
1
R3
A1
2
4
A2
2
R4
A2
VSM220-02
R1
R3
A1
R2
R4
A2
VSM425 - only AC supply voltage
Connection VSM425
VSM425-40
6
1 13 3 23 5 33 7 43
A1
2 14 4 24 6 34 8 44
A2
6
0.2x10
0.3x106
0.1x106 by 30 μF
0.1 106 by 1.5 kW
0.2x106
0.3x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
20 A
2
4 kV
0.2x10
0.5x106
0.1x106 by 36 μF
0.1x106 by1.5 kW
0.2x106
0.5x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
25 A
2
4 kV
AWG 7 (10 mm2)
6 mm2
1.2 Nm
AWG 7 (10 mm2)
6 mm2
1.2 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AC 12 V, 24 V, 42 V,
48 V, 110 V, 127 V, 230 V
2.8 VA/1.2 W
12 VA /10 W
max. 2 contactors*
AC 12 V, 24 V, 42 V,
48 V, 110 V, 127 V, 230 V
5.5 VA/1.6 W
33 VA/25 W
max. 2 contactors*
23.. 131 °F (-5.. +55 °C)
-22.. 176 °F (-30.. +80 °C)
4.9 oz. (140 g)
260 g (9.17 oz.)
0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝
1.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝
(17.5 x 85 x 60 mm)
(35 x 85 x 60 mm)
VS425-31
1 13 3 23 5 33 R7 41
A1
2 14 4 24 6 34 R8 42
A2
VSM425-22
1 13 R3 21 R5 31
7 43
A1
2 14 R4 22 R6 32
8 44
A2
VSM425-04
R1 11 R3 21 R5 31 R7 41
A1
R2 12 R4 22 R6 32 R8 42
A2
Auxiliary contacts VSK-11 and VSK-20
Datas of auxiliary contacts for VSK-11 and VSK-20 see page 81
IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 61095, EN 60947-4-1, EN 61095, VDE 0660
*Note: In case several contactors are mounted close to each other, you need to use a installation spacer between every other contactor. We offer installation spacer of type IKV.
82
Loadability of installation contactors
TYPE OF LIGHT
Incandescent lamps
Flourescent lamps
Flourescent lamps
lead-lag circuit
Flourescent lamps
parallel correction
Flourescent lamps
with electronic
ballast units (EVG)
High-pressure
mercury-vapour
lamps uncorrected
High-pressure mercuryvapour lamps parallel
correction
Halogen metal
vapour lamps
uncorrected
Halogen metal-vapour
lamps parallel correction
High-pressure sodiumvapour lamps uncorrected
High-pressure sodiumvapour lamps parallel
correction
Low-pressure sodiumvapour lamps uncorrected
Low-pressure sodiumvapour lamps parallel
correction
OPERATION (W)
60
100
200
500
1000
18
24
36
58
18
24
36
58
18
24
36
58
1 x 18
1 x 36
1 x 58
2 x 18
2 x 36
2 x 58
50
80
125
250
400
700
1000
50
80
125
250
400
700
1000
35
70
150
250
400
1000
2000
35
70
150
250
400
1000
2000
150
250
400
1000
150
250
400
1000
18
35
55
90
135
180
18
35
55
90
135
180
I (A)
0.26
0.43
0.87
2.17
4.35
0.37
0.35
0.43
0.67
0.11
0.14
0.22
0.35
0.12
0.15
0.2
0.32
0.09
0.16
0.25
0.17
0.32
0.49
0.61
0.8
1.15
2.15
3.25
5.4
7.5
0.28
0.41
0.65
1.22
1.95
3.45
4.8
0.53
1
1.8
3
3.5
9.5
16.5
0.25
0.45
0.75
1.5
2.5
5.8
11.5
1.8
3
4.7
10.3
0.83
1.5
2.4
6.3
0.35
1.5
1.5
2.4
3.5
3.3
0.35
0.31
0.42
0.63
0.94
1.16
VS120
VS220
VS420
33
20
10
3
1
22
22
17
14
2 x 30
2 x 24
2 x 17
2 x 10
7
7
7
4
25
15
14
12
7
7
14
10
7
4
2
1
1
4
4
3
1
1
18
10
5
3
3
1
5
2
1
5
3
2
1
22
7
7
4
3
3
6
1
1
1
-
33
20
10
3
1
22
22
17
14
2 x 30
2 x 24
2 x 17
2 x 10
7
7
7
4
25
15
14
12
7
7
14
10
7
4
2
1
1
4
4
3
1
1
18
10
5
3
3
1
5
2
1
5
3
2
1
22
7
7
4
3
3
6
1
1
1
-
33
20
10
3
1
22
22
17
14
2 x 30
2 x 24
2 x 17
2 x 10
7
7
7
4
25
15
14
12
7
7
14
10
7
4
2
1
1
4
4
3
1
1
18
10
5
3
3
1
5
2
1
5
3
2
1
22
7
7
4
3
3
6
1
1
1
-
Number of lights on one contactor’s contact
VS425
VS440
VS463
VSM220
33
20
10
3
1
24
24
20
17
2 x 40
2 x 31
2 x 24
2 x 14
8
8
8
5
35
20
19
17
10
9
18
13
9
5
3
2
1
5
5
4
2
1
22
12
7
4
3
1
6
3
1
1
1
6
4
2
1
1
1
27
9
9
5
4
4
7
1
1
1
-
65
40
20
8
4
90
90
65
45
2 x 100
2 x 78
2 x 65
2 x 40
48
48
48
31
100
52
50
50
26
25
38
29
20
10
7
4
3
31
27
22
12
9
5
4
43
23
12
7
6
2
1
36
18
11
6
6
2
1
17
10
6
3
11
6
4
2
71
23
23
14
10
10
44
11
11
8
4
5
85
50
25
10
5
140
140
95
70
2 x 150
2 x 118
2 x 95
2 x 60
73
73
73
47
140
75
72
70
38
36
55
42
29
15
10
6
4
47
41
33
18
13
7
5
60
32
18
10
9
3
1
50
25
15
9
8
3
2
22
13
8
3
16
10
6
3
90
30
30
19
13
13
66
16
16
12
7
8
33
20
10
3
1
22
22
17
14
2 x 30
2 x 24
2 x 17
2 x 10
7
7
7
4
25
15
14
12
7
7
14
10
7
4
2
1
1
4
4
3
1
1
18
10
5
3
3
1
5
2
1
5
3
2
1
22
7
7
4
3
3
6
1
1
1
-
VSM425
33
20
10
3
1
24
24
20
17
2 x 40
2 x 31
2 x 24
2 x 14
8
8
8
5
35
20
19
17
10
9
18
13
9
5
3
2
1
5
5
4
2
1
22
12
7
4
3
1
6
3
1
1
1
6
4
2
1
1
1
27
9
9
5
4
4
7
1
1
1
-
83
EAN codes
EAN codes for VS
VS120
VS220
VS420
VS120-01 24V AC/DC: 8595188129848
VS120-01 230V AC/DC: 8595188123105
VS220-02 24V AC/DC: 8595188129381
VS220-02 110V AC/DC: 8595188138628
VS220-02 230V AC/DC: 8595188121422
VS420-31 24V AC:
VS420-31 110V AC:
VS420-31 230V AC:
8595188129442
8595188129466
8595188121446
VS220-11 24V AC/DC:
VS220-11 48V AC/DC:
VS220-11 110V AC/DC:
VS220-11 230V AC/DC:
8595188129374
8595188129398
8595188130790
8595188121408
VS420-40 12V AC:
VS420-40 24V AC:
VS420-40 48V AC.
VS420-40 230V AC:
8595188129459
8595188129435
8595188138581
8595188121439
VS220-20 24V AC/DC:
VS220-20 48V AC/DC:
VS220-20 110V AC/DC:
VS220-20 230V AC/DC:
8595188125253
8595188129411
8595188129428
8595188121392
VS120-10 24V AC/DC: 8595188129367
VS120-10 230V AC/DC: 8595188123112
VS425
VS425-04 24V AC/DC:
VS425-04 48V AC/DC:
VS425-04 110V AC/DC:
VS425-04 230V AC/DC:
8595188129527
8595188129558
8595188160032
8595188121682
VS440
VS463
VS440-04 24V AC/DC: 8595188129299
VS440-04 110V AC/DC: 8595188129305
VS463-22 24V AC/DC: 8595188129794
VS463-22 230V AC/DC: 8595188121514
VS440-22 24V AC/DC: 8595188129787
VS440-22 230V AC/DC: 8595188121477
VS463-31 24V AC/DC: 8595188129596
VS463-31 110V AC/DC: 8595188137904
VS463-31 230V AC/DC: 8595188121507
VS425-13 230V AC/DC: 8595188129473
VS425-22 24V AC/DC: 8595188129541
VS425-22 230V AC/DC: 8595188121675
VS425-31 24V AC/DC:
VS425-31 48V AC/DC:
VS425-31 110V AC/DC:
VS425-31 230V AC/DC:
8595188129497
8595188137898
8595188129534
8595188121668
VS440-31 24V AC/DC: 8595188129572
VS440-31 230V AC/DC: 8595188121460
VS440-40 24V AC/DC: 8595188129565
VS440-40 110V AC/DC: 8595188138567
VS440-40 230V AC/DC: 8595188121453
VS425-40 24V AC/DC: 8595188129480
VS425-40 48V AC/DC: 8595188136174
VS425-40 230V AC/DC: 8595188121651
EAN codes for VSM
VSM220
VSM425
VSM220-02 24V AC:
VSM220-02 230V AC:
8595188129817
8595188128100
VSM425-04 24V AC:
VSM425-04 230V AC:
8595188129831
8595188128155
VSM220-11 24V AC:
VSM220-11 230V AC:
8595188129800
8595188128094
VSM425-22 24V AC:
VSM425-22 230V AC:
8595188129336
8595188128148
VSM220-20 12V AC:
VSM220-20 24V AC:
VSM220-20 230V AC:
8595188138369
8595188128117
8595188128087
VSM425-31 24V AC:
VSM425-31 42V AC:
VSM425-31 230V AC:
8595188129824
8595188160247
8595188128131
VSM425-40 12V AC:
VSM425-40 24V AC:
VSM425-40 230V AC:
8595188160049
8595188128162
8595188128124
EAN codes for VSK
84
VSK-11:
8595188121613
VSK-20:
8595188121606
VS463-40 24V AC/DC: 8595188129589
VS463-40 110V AC/DC: 8595188140652
VS463-40 230V AC/DC: 8595188121491
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Main regulations for correct use of products
Product loadability
Electro-magnectic compatibility of products
EMC chart
Overview of tested types of light sources and the loads
Products packing
Dimensions
Examples of usage
Support of project designing
Production technology
85
Main instructions for correct use of ELKO EP products
To ensure correct and perfect function of a device and its safe operation, it is necessary to ensure and observe several main regulations:
1.) Device supply
- it is necessary to ensure continuous supply of the device without drops and voltage peaks. It is mainly important for device (e.g. dimmers) where there is synchronization managed by sine wave of the
main and fault in the main ca cause unreliable function of the device
- it is necessary to observe correct connection of terminals, and in case of DC supply voltage also polarity
- it is necessary to observe allowed tolerance of the size of supply voltage which is given by technical parameters of individual devices
2.) Protection of the device
- it is necessary to ensure protection of the device by adequate elements of overvoltage protection – by fuses, by surge arrestors
3.) Elimination of disturbances on input circuits
- it is recommended to eliminate disturbances on control inputs of devices by suitable elements (R-C elements) and thus minimize creation of inductive voltage on incoming wires
- pay attention when connecting control inputs and keep in mind max. current and min. voltage at rest, which can cause spontaneous switching of device
4.) Opereting conditions
- to assure the granted life and correct functions of device, there is not recommended to leave the device in extreme conditions that could negative way influence the correct device functions - permanent
temperature influence over 70°C, aggressive exhalations, chemicals, high relative humadity over 95%, high electromagnetic field or microwave radiation
- for error-free function it is necessary to avoid device placement close to electromagnetic interference source
- all mentioned products fulfill the EMC requirements in accordance with EU Directive 89/336/EEC. Notwithstanding it is necessary to pay attention when devices are connected to circuit with electrical
appliances that produce electromagnetic interference (contactors, motors), and pay attention to close power cables. It is recommended that device connecting cables (supply and control inputs) are
possibly short and go separately from power cables. In case the device is connected to circuit with contactors or motors, it is necessary to protect the device with appropriate extern protection components - RC members, varistors or surge voltage protector.
- when you use AL wires, it is necessary to follow requirements of ČSN standard 370606: 1959 and ČSN 370606 amendment 2: 1992
5.) Device handling and using
- input terminals do not fill-in with high power (for serial terminals max 0.5 N/m), do not give excessive pressure to carrier terminal parts to avoid demage of inner device construction
- protect the device before falls and excessive vibrations that could demage relays contacts
- do not overload input relay´s contacts, especially when using loads with other category then AC1
- when at switching of big loads the relay contacts get sealed it is necessary to use inserted contactor or power relay tuned to required load for given application
Description of used protection elements in device
All time and monitoring relays from our assortment are equipped with protective elements (varistors) against possible overvoltage in supply main. Limit voltage of used varistors is 275 V. At short-time
overvoltage in supply main varistor decrease its leak resistor and accumulate arosen overvoltage. When this overvoltage behave as short-time peak, varistor is able to react and protect the device against
negative influences. As other protection elements there are used transils and zener diodes that eliminate overvoltage impulses in supply and input circuits of device (e.g. when switching inductive loads).
In case of switching inductive loads it is recommended to separate a supply of power element (motors, contactors etc.) from supply of measuring and control device inputs.
On the charts bellow you can see oscilographic running of disconnecting of loads (contactors) and reaction of protective elements to arosen voltage pikes.
Process of disconnection of contactor with coil on
230V/AC without R-C member
Osciloscope configuration
U=200 V/d
t=5ms/d
86
Process of disconnection of contactor with coil on
230V/AC and R-C member 390 Ohm-330 nF
Osciloscope configuration
U=200 V/d
t=10ms/d
Process of disconnection of contactor with coil and limited
varistor on 230V/AC
Osciloscope configuration
U=200 V/d
t=5ms/d
Product loadability
SOU-3
CRM-4; HRH-7; MR-41; MR-42;
SHT-1; SHT-1/2; SHT-3; SHT-3/2;
SMR-B; SOU-1; RHT-1; TER-3A;
TER-3B; TER-3C; TER-3D; TER-3E;
TER-3F; TER-3G; TER-3H ; VS116U;
VS316/24V; VS316/120
CRM-82TO; CRM-83J;
CRM-93H; PRM-2H;
PRM-92H; TER-7;
VS308U; CRM-61; HRH-5;
HRN-56; PRI-32; PRI-51;
PRI-52; PRI-53; TER-9
HRH-6
COS-1; CRM-2H; CRM-2HE;
CRM-2T; CRM-81J; CRM-91H;
CRM-91HE; HRH-1; HRN-33;
HRN-34; HRN-35; HRN-37; HRN41; HRN-42;HRN-43; HRN-43N;
HRN-63; HRN-64; HRN-67; PDR2; PRI-41; PRI-42; PRM-91H;
SJR-2; TER-4
Material of contact AgSnO2
contact 12A
Material of contact AgSnO2
contact 16A
Material of contact AgNi
contact 8A
Material of contact AgNi
contact 10A
Material of contact AgNi
contact 16A
250V / 12A
250V / 16A
250V / 8A
250V / 10A
250V / 16A
M
250V / 3.7A
250V / 5A
250V / 3A
250V / 3A
250V / 5A
M
250V /2.2A
250V / 3A
250V /2A
250V /2A
250V / 3A
230V / 2.2A (510VA)
230V / 3A (690VA)
230V / 1.5A (345VA)
230V / 2A (460VA)
230V / 3A (690VA)
230V / 2.2A (510VA)
till max output C=14UF
230V / 3A (690VA)
till max output C=14UF
x
x
x
1 120W
1000W
300W
500W
800W
x
x
x
x
x
250V / 2.2A
250V / 3A
250V /1A
250V / 2A
250V / 3A
250V / 7.5A
x
250V /1A
250V / 6A
250V / 10A
250V / 4.5A
x
x
250V / 3.8A
250V / 6A
250V / 4.5A
250V / 6A
250V /3A
250V / 3.8A
250V / 6A
250V / 4.5A
250V / 6A
250V /3A
250V / 3.8A
250V / 6A
24V / 12A
24V / 10A
30V / 8A
24V / 10A
24V / 16A
M
24V / 4.5A
24V / 3A
30V / 3A
24V / 3.8A
24V / 6A
M
24V / 3A
24V / 2A
30V / 2A
24V / 2.5A
24V / 4A
24V / 12A
24V / 6A
30V / 8A
24V / 10A
24V / 16A
24V / 1.5A
24V / 2A
30V / 2A
24V / 1.3A
24V / 2A
24V / 1.5A
x
x
24V / 1.3A
24V / 2A
PRODUCT
CONTACT
TYPE OF LOAD
cos φ ≥ 0.95
AC1
AC2
AC3
AC5a uncompensated
AC5a compensated
HAL.230V
AC5b
AC6a
AC7b
AC12
AC13
AC14
K
AC15
DC1
DC3
DC5
DC12
DC13
DC14
87
Product loadability
Problematic choice of suitable relay contact for a particular load switched with a product is described below.
Mostly we experience problems with incorrect choice of load (meaning incorrect relay for a particular load) which results in permanent switching of contact (sealing) or damage on relay contact – which then results in malfunction.
What load can you use?
Detailed types of load according to standard EN 60947 are described in charts below – categories of use.
Category of use
Typical use
EN
AC current, cosφ = P/S (-)
AC-1
Non-inductive or slightly inductive load, resistance furnace
Includes all appliances supplied by AC current with power factor (cos φ) ≥ 0.95
Examples of usage: resistance furnace, industrial loads
AC-2
Motors with slip-ring armature, switching off
AC-3
Motors with short-circuit armature, motor switching when in operation
This category applies to switching off motors with short-circuit armature while in operation. While switching, contactor switches current which is 5 up to 7 times
rated current of motor.
60947-4
60947
60947-4
AC-4
Electro-motors with short-circuit armature: start up, braking by backset, changeover
AC-5a
Switching of electrical gas-filled lights, fluorescent lights
60947-4
AC-5b
El. bulb switching
Enables low contact loading due to resistance of cold fiber is many times smaller that the one of hot fiber.
60947-4
AC-6a
Switching of transformers
60947-4
AC-6b
Switching of capacitors
60947-4
AC-7a
Switching low inductive loads of home appliances and similar applications
60947
AC-7b
Load of motors for home appliances
60947
AC-8a
Switching of hermetically sealed motors of cooling compressors with manual reset switches against overload
Hermetically sealed cooling compressors have to be placed in one box without external shaft or shaft padding and motor must operate with cooling liquid
60947
AC-8b
Switching of hermetically sealed motors of cooling compressors with manual reset switches against overload
Hermetically sealed cooling compressors have to be placed in one box without external shaft or shaft padding and motor must operate with cooling liquid
60947
60947
AC-12
Switching of semiconductor loads with separation transformers
60947-5
AC-13
Switching of semiconductor loads with separation transformers
60947-5-1
AC-14
Switching of low electro-magnetic loads (max.72 VA)
60947-5-1
AC-15
Management of alternating electro-magnetic loads
This category applies to switching inductive loads with input for closed electro-magnetic circuit higher than 72 VA
Use: switching coils of contactors
60947-5
AC-20
Connecting and disconnecting in unloaded states
60947-3
AC-21
Switching resistive loads, including low loading
60947-3
AC-22
Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, including low overloading
60947-3
AC-23
Switching of motor loads or other high inductive loads
60947-3
AC-53a
Switching of motors with short-circuit armature with semiconductor contactors
60947
Note: Category AC 15 replaces formerly used category AC 11
DC current, t = L/R (s)
DC-1
Non-inductive or low inductive load, resistive furnaces
DC-3
Shunt motors: start-up, braking by backset, reversion, resistive braking
60947-4-1
DC-5
Series motor: start-up, braking by backset, reversion, resistive braking
60947-4-1
DC-6
Non-inductive or low inductive loads, resistive furnaces – el. bulbs
60947-4-1
DC-12
Management of resistive loads and fixed loads with insulation by opto-electric element
60947-5-1
DC-13
Switching of electromagnets
60947-5-1
DC-14
Switching of electromagnetic loads in circuits with limiting resistor
60947-5-1
60947-4
DC-20a(b)
Switching and breaking without load(a: frequent switching ,b: occasional switching)
60947-3
DC-21a(b)
Switching ohmic loads including limiting overloading (a: frequent switching ,b: occasional switching)
60947-3
DC-22a(b)
Switching of compound ohmic and inductive loads including limited overloads ( e.g. shunt motors) (a: frequent switching, b: random switching)
60947-3
Switching of highly inductive loads (e.g. series motors)
60947-3
DC-23
How can you distinguish for which load is our product (relay) designated?
Our company record this information on a products and also in our catalogue, instruction manual and other promotional and technical material (website etc.).
It is important to realize that it is not always possible to point out load because of lack of information about the device (user cannot measure cos) or it is not possible because of inconstancy of parameters of switched device.
Manufacturer of relays records always guaranteed parameters in ideal conditions which are done by a norm (temperature, pressure, humidity, etc.) and reality can be in a lot of cases different. Category of use (classification) of a
particular relay is done by material of output contacts.
Basic types of materials which are used for production of contacts for high-performance relay are:
a)AgCd – suitable for switching ohmic loads. Before of harmfulness of Cd, this type of contact is remitted
b)AgNi –designated for switching resistive loads , good quality switching and conducting (contact doesn’t oxidate) small currents/voltages ,it is not designated for surge currents and loads with inductive component
c) AgSn or AgSnO2 –suitable for switching loads with inductive component , not suitable for switching small currents/voltages, it is more resistive to surge currents, suitable for DC voltage switching, less suitable for switching
loads of ohmic type
d)Wf (wolfram)-special contact designated for switching surge currents with inductive component
e)with gold (AgNi/Au)- Used for “improving” contacts for low currents/ voltages , prevents oxidation
88
Electromagnetic compatibility of ELKO EP, s.r.o. products
Electromagnetic compatability (EMC) is a new scientific field which was founded in the 60s last century. It had been known only
to a small number of specialists working in a military and cosmic research.
Electromagnetic compatability EMC is defined as an ability of a device, system or a machine to show the correct operation even
in an environment in which there are other sources of electromagnetic signals (natural or artificial), and also an ability not to
influence negatively the environment by its own “electromagnetic action” and not to radiate signals that would disturb other
devices. It is an indicator of good quality and reliability. Breach of such EMC requirements may cause several damages with
catastrophical consequences.
When testing EMC of a device or system (technical and biological), it is based on so called “ fundamental chain of EMC” shown in
the picture. This chain shows a system problematic of EMC and we inspect all three components.
SOURCE OF
ELECTROMAGNETIC
DISTURBANCES
motors, switches, relays, power
distributions, semi-conducting alternators,
fluorescent tubes, arc furnances, welding
machines, oscillators, PC, digital systems,
electrostatic discharge...
ENVIRONMENT OF DISTRIBUTION,
ELECTROMAGNETIC STRUCTURE
DISTURBED OBJECT,
DISTURBING RECEIVER
air space, energy cables, supply convection,
convection, grounding, screening, signaling
conductors, data condutors...
digital devices, PC, measuring devices,
automatization device, telecommunication
system, data transmission system, wireless
set, television receivers...
Test SURGE
For guarantee the immunity of our devices against to electromagnetic disturbance we are doing EMC tests and according results we are still innovating our product to be accoding the EMC norms with reserve.
The most important test is immunity against gust of high-energy voltage and current impulse (SURGE), what is made according the norm IEC 61000-4-5.
By this our products are controlled in case of short time pulse, what is apllicated as to input as to output circuits of divices, to switching inputs, sensing inputs, etc. Our produts pass all criterias and are fully competitive to foreign
products.
Test SURGE is used in practice mainly for 1-phase devices with take-off current to 16 A. It makes use of voltage impulse 1,2/50 ms no load and current impulse 8/20 ms for short time. Size of used voltage impulse is 0.5 kV, 1 kV,
2 kV and 4 kV, size of used current impulse is 2kA on 4kV with choise of changing polarity. For testing by impulses is as coup mode specify capacitive coupling.
Test BURST
Other very important test is test immunity against quick short-lived effect (couple of impulses- BURST), which dissimulated influence if industry disturbance. Test is made according to the norm IEC 61000-4-4.
Disturbance signal is injected to supply circuits and communication cabling. Coupling is made by 1-phase capacitive circuit or coupling capacitive ribband to supply, signalling or data convection of tested device. Size of testing
impulses is 0.5 kV, 1 kV, 2 kV and 4 kV in possitive and negative polarity. Repeat frequence is 2.5 kHz, or 5 kHz. Period of testing 0 - 6 minut by steps for 0.1s.
Test POWERFAIL
For right function of products in industry is important POWERFAIL test - simulation of decreasing and failure of supply voltage. It is made according to the IEC 61000-4-11.
Short-time supply decreasing are random decreasing of supply voltage, which are more than 10 - 15 % of its nominal size and have short time existing 0.5 - 50 periodes of basic frequency 50 Hz.
Short breaks of voltage are short time decreasing over 100 %. Mentioned changes of supply circuit voltage are made in practise by disturbance in mains (high voltage, low voltage ) and breaks on load of the main.
Test of EMC emissions
Electronic devices must be designed not to be a source of oversize electric or electromagnetic disturbances in its surroundings. Test is executed according to standard EN 55022.
Emissions are measured by wires or by air.
Test of electromagnetic high-frequency field and HF signal coming from the main
The purpose of this test is to verify immunity of the device against electromagnetic fields that are created by radio transmitters or by any other device which transmits electromagnetic energy by uninterrupted waves (walkietalkies, radio and TV transmitters.)
Test is carried out against disturbances in the main and emissions. We apply testing level 3 which for HF field means intensity of field 10 V/m and for HF signal it is voltage level 10 V.
Test of electrostatic discharge
It is a test of resistance against discharges of electrostatic energy caused by servicing or by surrounding objects. Such discharge can damage a device or its components.
Test is carried out by direct or indirect application of discharges to a tested device. Test is carried out according to a standard EN 61000-4-2. Direct influence of discharges is targeted into such places and surfaces that are accessible
to servicing during common use. Indirect influence of discharge is done by horizontal and vertical coupling board.
The device is treated by at least ten individual discharges for positive and negative polarity. Testing levels are 2kV, 4kV, 6kV, 8kV, 15kV.
Company ELKO EP has its own test laboratory in which it carries out pre-certification for conditions that must be met by each of our products. Thus customers gets not only a product of a high quality, which is ensured by many years
of experience in the field of switching relays, but also a product which can operate in demanding conditions of industrial environment. Product, tested this way, guarantees reliability and functionality to customer’s full satisfaction.
89
Products packing
Products
90
Packing
COS-1, HRH-1, HRN-41, HRN-42,
HRN-43, PDR-2, PRI-41, PRI-42,
PS-30-12, PS-30-24, PS-30-R
Packing of 3-MODULE relay - 1 pc
SHT-1, SHT-3,
SHT-1/2, SHT-3/2
Packing of 2-MODULE relay - 1 pc
PRM-91H, PRM-92H,
PRM-2H
Packing of plug - in relay - 2 pc
SOU-1, LIC-2,
CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE
Packing of 1-MODULE relay
with accessories
CRM-81J, CRM-83J, CRM-82TO,
CRM-61, CRM-9S, CRM-2H,
CRM-2T, CRM-4, SOU-1, HRH-5,
HRN-33, HRN-34, HRN-35, HRN-55,
HRN-55N, HRN-54, MR-41, MR-42,
PRI-51, SJR-2, TER-3, TER-7,
HRN-56, HRN-63, HRN-64, HRN-67,
VS116U, VS316/24
Packing of 1-MODULE relay
- 10pc
Design
Dimensions
1-MODULE DESIGN
17.6
PRI-32
59
5
18.2
25.8
80.5
4
21.5
59
8.4
5
11.3 11.3
13.8
11
25
90
44.8
35.6
Ø3
11.4
Ø 6.5
11.3
11.3
Ø6
front panels 1-MODULE, examples of use:
CRM-81J
CRM-82TO
SJR-2
CRM-2HE
CRM-91H
HRN-56
CRM-4
2-MODULE DESIGN
MR-42
PRI-51
SOU-1
HRH-5
TER-7
Temperature sensor
65
35
16.5
19
29.5
TC
20 mm /0.8˝
5
11.2 11.2
30
8.2 mm
0.3˝
22.65 mm /0.9˝
90
45
35.6
TZ
11.3
6.2 mm
0.2˝
PT100
11.3
24 mm / 0.9˝
4.6 mm
0.2˝
SMR-M
SMR-T
PSB
15.4
49
21
SMR-B
15.4
49
21
15.4
49
13.3
49
21
91
Dimensions
3-MODULE DESIGN
65
11.2 11.2
45
19
HRH-1
29.5
HRN-56
11.2
11.2
5
44.4
42.3
48
16.5
90
52
35.6
52
front panels 3-MODULE,
examples of use:
HRN-41
PS-30-R
PS-30-12
6-MODULE DESIGN
5
11.2 11.2
45
19
front panels 6-MODULE, examples of use:
29.5
PRI-53
90
16.5
48
42.3
48
65
35.6
105
11.2
11.2
PS-100-12
21
2
70
96
26
SOU-3
92
62
34
Dimensions
HRH-6
110
20
6x
66
4
14
50
27
M16x1.5
27
M16x1.5
15
15
15
110
20
15
15
30
M16x1.5
28
HRH-6/S
28
110
20
6x
66
4
M16x1.5
15
15
15
110
15
15
50
28
PRM-91H/11, PRM-91H/8, PRM-92H, PRM-2H
38
13
M18x1.5
60
50
45
38
Level sensor
SHR-3
9.5
51
Socket for PRM-91H/11, PRM-92H, PRM-2H
Socket for PRM-91/8
11.5
6HR 24
21
photosensor SKS
external potentiometer
for CRM-2HE, CRM-91HE
21.8
ES-8
ES-11
27
38
30
22
M 22x1
27
30
28
ø 4.2
21
ø 4.2
23
13
ø 3.2
89
ø 3.2
65
65
5.6
5.6
17
13
38
27
B1 B3 B2
20.8
15
93
Dimensions
VS120
VS220
VS425
VS440
VS463
65.4
45
85
53.3
45
85
35
45
85
17.5
47.5
VS420
45
35.5
62.5
55
49.4
4.4
4.7
35.5
63
HRH-7
ATV-1
25
114
53.5
02
Mo
21
Mi
Do
8
Fr
4
Sa
So
:
AUTO
MANU
76.5
PG13.5
61
Di
114
MENU
OK
+
25
63
PG13.5
40
56
PG13.5
40
94
Support of project design
Our aim is to give a complete care to all electro project designers.
Our activities:
Our products are a part of the following programs:
Project programs
Award programs
VeroX
Obis
DTB ELKO EP XLS
XLS
elektrotechnika
MARKS AND SYMBOLS DWG
TRAINING
In case our products attracted your interest, do not hesitate to contact us at [email protected] or see our websites www.elkoep.com for more information.
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
In case of any questions regarding use of our products for a particular project, contact us at [email protected]
Note.: logos, names, software, hardware are protected by owner’s rights.
95
Examples of usage
Multifunction time relay CRM-91H,CRM-93H
- for electric appliances, where is necessary to change the exact timing - controlling of the illumination, heating, motors, machines, ventilators, contactors...
N
N
L
L
A1
S A1
A2
S A2
here
s
lway
yw
ever
and
ity a
al
tion
func
i
Mult
15
16
15
18
Multifunction time relay with contactless output CRM-9S
- using for warning illuminatin on the road, flashers, cyclers, often switched systems ...
12 V AC
16
18
Multifunction time relay with external potentiometer CRM-91HE
- time adjusting via external operating unit, operating on panel, switchboard doors
N
L
A1
A1
S S A2
A2
B1
B2
B3
external operating unit
CR -9S
B1
18
18
Time relay plug-in type PRM-91H, PRM-92H
- serves to control light signallization, heating, motor and fan control etc.
15
18
16
Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO
- delayed back-up switch off at current failure (emergency illumination, emergency respirator)
N
L
A1
A2
16
26
CRM-82TO
FUNC
e
28
18
L
N
96
15
a
25
Examples of usage
Digital time switch SHT-1/2
- for controlling of all appliances that depend on real time, appliances could be controlled in regular cycles, or according to adjusted program (blocking of main door out of working hours or night)
- in combination with other devices, controlling could be combinated (rooms ventilation, irrigation controlling, bell at school or in church...)
N
ur
n yo y
i
g
n
eati rida
ch h .g. on F
t
i
w
s e... e
d to
nee ou arriv
u
o
n y re y
Whe ge befo .m.
p
a
cott at 1:13
h
13t
L
18
15
16
A1
7
Auto
0
12
6
SHT-1/2
PRG
RESET
A2
26
MAN 2
+
MAN
_
OK
ESC
28
25
Doublestage delay unit SJR-2
- for sequential load switching, electric furnaces, heaters....
Asymmetric cycler CRM-2H
- regular rooms ventilation, cyclic humidity exhaustion, illumination controlling, circulation pump,
flash, warning appliances, regular pump down, regular irrigation via electromagnetic valve
N
N
L
A1
A2
L
S A1
it
ircu
he c e d
t
n
rn o a u s
to tu surge c ivide
t
n
a
r
d
´t w owe So
don fter a p loads? turn on
u
o
Y er a arge nd
l
a
k
brea itching circuits
l
w
a
by s sever
to
it in y one.
b
e
on
A2
1
2
25
15
16
26
28
18
3
15
Staircase switch CRM-4
- staircase automatic systems, ventilators switching, for multiplace operating illumination
on the staircases and halls...
16
18
y in
tedl
pea rent.
e
r
ff
e
nd o diff
on a time is
g
n
i
h
ng
witc losi
g“ s g and c
n
i
h
in
et
som pen
ed „ le the o
e
n
i
u
n yo e, wh
Whe of tim
s
term
Singlefunction time relay CRM-81J
- time switch, using for run down the pump after switch off the heating, switching of
ventilators ...
N
N
L
L
A1
S A1
A2
you
en
h
W
the
urn
t
o
t
get
for
S A2
..
off.
s
t
ligh
15
16 18
15 16 18
97
Examples of usage
Digital time switch SHT-1, SHT-1/2
- for controlling of all appliances that depend on real time, in daily or weekly mode
N
Monitoring current relay PRI-41 (PRI-42)
- monitoring over-/-underload (machine, motor ...)
- monitoring consumption, diagnostics of distant appliance (short circuit, increased consump. ...)
N
L
L
18
15
16
A1
7
Auto
12
6
0
SHT-1/2
PRG
MAN 2
+
OK
MAN
reset
ESC
_
28
25
26
A2
d
t un
rren ss
u
c
se gla
-pha ing
One agnify
m
er
Programmable digital relay PDR-2
- illumination, ventilators, contactors controlling, controlling of interlocking plans, system of time abate and blocking (billiards, pin-balls....), away control via external buttons
N
L
tion
rma
26
25
28
18
15
....
time
fo
e in
urat
cc
nd a
a
um
axim y....
m
d
nee ispla
you ed a d
n
e
Wh you ne
then
ut
abo
16
Twilight switch SOU-1
- outdoor illumination switching (garden illumination), flash, shop-window, hall and office illumination (switch off in desired light level, controlling of intensity)
N
N
L
L
A1
S A2
IN
IN
15
98
i
g, if
htin
g
i
l
off ey.
on / ur mon
s
n
r
o
u
y
lly t ve
tica sary. Sa
a
m
s
Auto nece
16
18
t is
A1
S VS425
A2
IN
IN
15
16
18
VS425
Examples of usage
Memory relay MR-41, MR-42
- because of 2-wire parallel buttons connection save money, place and time during the installation
- light switching, hall, staircase, big rooms, controlling systems, automation
Power relays VS
- switching of higher load than is capacity of switched unit = repeater
- assistant light controlling, signalling, boilers, ...
will
hey
t
,
u
lp yo d...“
ill he d exten
w
y
„The nsify an
inte
N
L
N
L
A1 ON/OFF A2
B2
B1
A1
MR-42
A3
A2
1
Un
2
LED
14
12
11
ore
. No m
e
l
b
a
t
r
omfo
and c es.“
y
s
a
e
l
of cab
h OFF
/ Pus nd bunch
N
O
a
„Push switches
cross
24
22
21
11
Switching power supply PS-30-R
- power supply of any devices and appliances via safe voltage with full galvanically separated
from mains
- power supply of driving systems, interlocking plants and use in measurement and control
12
14
Multifunction time relay CRM-61
- for electronic appliances, light control, heating, motors, fans.....
L
N
A2
A1
S
N
L
CRM-61
21
22
24
A1
A3
A2
PS-30-R
-30-R
LED
16
11
12
14
15
31
32
Thermostat for thermal protection of motors TER-7
- protection of motors against thermal overload
Multifunction digital thermostat TER-9
- complex control of heating and water heating in a house
N
L
A1
A2
25
26
28
Sim
ate. l
oo l contro
t
s
i
r
re it oto
Befo basic m
and
ple
N
L
sensor 1
A1
T1
18
15
16
T1
7
T1
Auto
0
6
0
16
15
Ta
R
18
in
ilt- sor
bu C sen
PT
Tb
VS425
18
34
A2
T2
C
sensor 2
12
T2
26
25
28
ill
ch w he
i
h
w
t
stat for
rmo ice and
e
h
t
lar
dev
simi in one n one?
a
w
s
ctio
no
on
ou k 6 functi gle-fun
y
o
D you
sin
e of
rs
offe pric
99
Examples of usage
øíkladpoit
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-33 (35)
- monitoring of mains voltage for appliances inclinable to supply tolerance
A1
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-33 (35)
- protection of appliances against under-/overvoltage
A2
A2
A1
15
ys
it pa
n
u
g
orin r
onit r highe
m
c
si be fa
o ba
t int e could
n
e
ag
stm
Inve Dam
16 18
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-35
- start of back-up supply in case of failure
25
off.
15
16
26
28
18
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-34
- load disconnected when voltage declines or battery is discharged
N
N
L
A1
A2
L
+
A1
A2
4
transformer
DC
AC
25
26
28
15
15
16
18
16
18
Monitoring current relay PRI-51, PRI-32
- current-limiting relay (on one branch two appliances, which never work together), controlling systems, motors, heating, current indication, controlling of 1-phase motor run down, during the installation
of main housing switchboard could be controlled via eye, if the cooker is not switched
- in connection with current transformers, it is possible to extend current ranges up to 600A, which makes more things possible
N
L
A1
B1
B2
16
15
100
r.
elpe
h
eful
y us ey.“
l
l
a
re on
m
but
reet ves you
c
s
i
„D It sa
A2
18
Examples of usage
Level switch HRH-1
- monitoring level in wells, tanks, pools, etc.
Level switch HRH-5
- monitoring level in well, sump, tanks, pool, silo...
N
L
N
L
HRH-1
?
own g
verfl le havin
o
r
e
k?
r ev whi
rvoi ything pty tan itch.
e
s
e
n
m
w
rr
you rnt e ith e vel s
Has ever bu erate w used le
p
t
u
e yo to o e no
Hav r pump aly hav
you u prob
s, yo
If ye
Thermostat TER-3 with external sensor
- control of temperature of floor heating
2 stage thermostat TER-4 with 2 external sensors
- control of temperature of e.g. gas/electric boiler
N
L
A1
ion
ulat
Reg
A2
T1
T1
fort
com
d
n
sa
ving
= sa
have
and ne
y
e
mon s in o
Save device
two
N
L
sensor 1
sensor 2
sensor
18
15
Modular contactor VS120, VS220, VS420, VS425
- to switch circuits for supply and control of heating, lights, air-conditioning and other el. devices.
Switches loads AC-1, AC-3, AC-7a, AC-7b, AC-15.
Modular contactors VS440, VS463
- to switch supply and control circuits for heating, air-conditioning and other el. devices,
switching 3-phase motors
Switches loads A-1, AC-3, AC-7a, AC-7b, and AC-15
L
N
VS220-20
L
N
VS440-40
I th = 20A
Control. Voltage
A1-A2 AC 230V
50/60Hz
A1-A2 DC 220V
( ) A1
1 3
( ) A2
2 4
20A / 1 230V
4kW / 1 230V
AC3 1.3kW / 1 230V
I th = 40A
3 5 7
( ) A1 1
A1-A2 AC 220-230V
50/60Hz
A1-A2 DC 220-230V ( )
A2 2 4 6 8
AC1
40A / 3 400V
26kW / 3 400V
AC3 11kW / 3 400V
AC1
101
Examples of usage
ENJOY THE COMPLETE HOUSEHOLD EQUIPMENT BY ELKO EP
CRM
CR
M - 91
M91H
H
DIM
DI
M - 15
M-
Multifunctional relay featuring
10 most frequently used functions
Dimming of energy saving
lights and LED lamps
SM RSMR
SM
R-B
Ventilation of the room after
turning off the button
TER
TE
R-9
SMR
SM
R -T
Water temperature control
ccording to 2 temperatures.
Delayed switch-off of room
lighting, steam extraction from
bathroom
COS
CO
S -1
SMonitoring the motor
overloading and balancing
HRN
HR
N -33
MR -4
42
Monitoring the voltage at the
devices “susceptible” to power
supply tolerance.
TER
TE
R -3A
Thermostat for temperature
monitoring and regulation
(for thawing the black ice).
PS -3
3 00-12
Power source
ESS, sensor, alarm
102
1
Control of lighting from multiple
locations, stepping relay.
SOU
SO
U-3
UFunction of light switch for
pulling down the shutters at
a high luminous intensity
PRII - 32
PR
Central monitoring of the current
“is there a lamp on without any
reason?”
SMR
SM
R-M
RVentilation of the room
after turning off the
PS
S B -10
0 -1
12
Ideal for supplying drives, motors,
light sources
CRM
CR
M-4
MStaircase automatic switch
controlling the light at the
SHT
SH
T-1
Real-time-based switching
of electrical equipment and
appliances
CRM
CR
M -2H
MH
Ensures circulation of water at
regular intervals ,
1x per 1 hour for 5 minutes
HRH
HR
H-5
Level switch - pumping
water from the tank
145
103
Examples of usage
INDUSTRIAL USE OF ELKO EP PRODUCTS
CRM-81J
Periodic ventilation
PRI-41/42
Monitoring the maximum
permissible weight
CRM-2T
Starting the motor, wye-delta
HRN-41
Monitoring the voltage level
TER-3
Monitoring temperature
in a tank.
VS425
PRI-51
Checking for conveyor jamming
= increase in
CRM-91H
Dosing material at preset
intervals
104
3-phase contactor
for triggering the motor
PS-30-R
Power supply at stabilised
voltage
MR-42
Group control of lighting from
more locations
PRI-53
Intended to monitor the current
in 3 phases
SOU-1
Automatic switching-on of the
outdoor lighting at dusk
PRI-51
Indication of machine failure /
operation , depending on the flowing
current
CRM-91H
Pulse shift
HRN-37
Voltage / low voltage
monitoring
HRN-64
CRM-2H
Observing the standby power
unit battery
Lubricant dispensing
COS-1
TER-9
Liquid temperature control of
two independent circuits
Power factor monitoring
= overall protection of motors
HRN-43
Assuring of continuous energy
supply. Back-up supply switching.
HRH-5
Observing the liquid level
SHT-1/2
Pre-heating the devices at
preset times
105
Production technology
The base of the production is a modern line disposing of SMD technology. SMD components compose of more than 80 % of all components. In the year 2004 the
production line was modernized distinctly and it was completed by some new machines. Herewith the accurancy improved considerably and the capacity enhanced.
106
1)
Printed circuit boards are placed into a cartridge and then automatically
delivered to SMD production line.
2)
Fully automatic adhesive and flux printer distributes adhesive or flux
through profile form to the place where the SMD components are then
mounted. Part of this process is also 3D optic inspection of the executed
operation.
3)
SMD components are mounted by pick-up machines. Three heads with
laser alignment can place up to 15,000 components an hour. This machine
replaces approximately 100 workers.
4)
PCBs with mounted SMD components are inspected and forwarded
to reflow.
5)
Hot-air furnace ERSA serves for glue hardening or to activation of soldering
flux by re-melting. The furnace has 3 zones. temperature after curing on 3rd
) output) zone approx. 1400C. For flux re-melting , the starting temperature
is 130 0C, middle 180 0C and output is 280 0C.
6)
Fully automatic line is ended by a cartridge which distributes picked
and cured PCBs into holders.
Production technology
7)
After the classic components are manually mounted by experienced workers.
8)
Manual placing of classical components is followed by soldering in
soldering unit SEHO 8135-PCS which already supports “lead free” soldering
technology. Thanks to IR pre-heating, this soldering unit allows operations
on PCB together with temperature sensitive components on the upper side
of PCB. Soldering unit is equipped by LW soldering jet and Delta jet. These
jets allow a good quality.
9)
After necessary semi-product testing on pin-testers final assembling into
enclosures is executed.
10)
The actual state of completion is monitored by bar codes during the whole
production process.
11)
Semi-finished PCBs are tested by this tester. It replaces visual control.
By using weight board, particular pins on bottom part are in contact.
Functionality of SMD components and classical components is checked.
Testing one PCB set takes about 20 s.
12)
In the end the products are fully printed by laser technology. Laser can
burn from upper part) side of the product) and side part (front panel and
terminals) printing one piece takes about 30 s.
107
ELKO EP Russia
ELKO EP Poland
ELKO EP Ukraine
ELKO EP Czech Republic
ELKO EP Germany
ELKO EP Austria
~
ELKO EP Espana
ELKO EP Slovakia
ELKO EP Hungary
iNELS Asia (China)
iNELS SmartHome LLC a company of ELKO EP Holding
3029 Bradbury Rd | Madison, WI 53719 | USA
phone: +420 573 514 221 | fax: +420 573 514 227 | [email protected] | www.elkoepusa.com
Published: 08/2015 / Modifications or amendments reserved / © Copyright ELKO EP, s.r.o. / 1st edition
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement